JP2020014961A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably setting a set value.SOLUTION: When a determination value acquired by acquisition means is determined as a specific determination value different from a set value, the acquisition means is controlled by acquisition control means so as to acquire a determination value which is newly generated by generation means. At this point, the number of set values which are set to specific determination values are set so that the ratio of the set values which are set to the set value is an integer, to a difference between the number of determination values in a predetermined range and the number of set values which are set to specific determination values. Thereby, a set value can be set suitably.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that performs various types of determination, such as determination as to whether or not a game ball has won a starting winning opening and determination of a display effect mode, is known. In such a gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined set value, and when the determination value matches the set value, the corresponding value is set. The set processing (determination of the effect mode, etc.) is executed.

JP-A-2002-331078

  However, there has been a demand for a more suitable method of setting the set values.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately set a setting value.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range, and an obtaining means for obtaining the determination value generated by the generating means And determining means for determining whether the determination value obtained by the obtaining means matches a predetermined set value, and when determining that the determined value matches the set value, determining whether the determined value matches the set value. Control means for executing a correspondingly set process, and, when it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is a specific determination value different from the set value, The acquisition unit having an acquisition control unit that controls the acquisition unit so as to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit, the number set to the specific determination value, the number of the determination value of the predetermined range The quantity and the specific On the difference between the number set in the value, the ratio of the number set in the set value is one that is set to be an integer.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than a shortest interval at which the obtaining unit obtains the determination value. .

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit, and the control unit can execute the control process. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the various control processes, and the control unit executes the control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit.

  In the gaming machine according to a fourth aspect, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control unit is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range, and The ratio is set so that the ratio to the difference from the number set to the specific determination value is an integer.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the determination value is continuously determined without being determined by the determination unit to match the predetermined set value. The number counting means for counting the number of continuous times when it is determined to be the specific determination value, and the determination by the determining means is terminated based on the fact that the number of continuous times counted by the number counting means has reached the specific number. And a determination ending means for performing the determination.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination unit newly obtains the determination value. The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means in such a manner. Here, the number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the set value can be set more appropriately.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the determination value is updated by the generation unit in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the obtaining unit obtains the determination value. In addition, it is possible to prevent the acquisition unit from acquiring the same determination value a plurality of times before the determination unit updates the determination value. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination result by the determination unit from being biased.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.

  Thus, different control processes can be executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means, so that there is an effect that various control processes can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the third aspect, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is determined by a predetermined range of the determination value. Since the ratio to the difference between the number and the number set to the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio at which each control process is executed can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand. This has the effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effects are obtained. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. The determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination termination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the means has reached the specific number.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the specific determination value is continuously determined and the other control processing cannot be executed during that time.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and a jackpot determination value in a special symbol, and (b) is a first diagram in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in a special symbol, and (c) shows typically the correspondence of the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probable change) fluctuation table; FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a notice effect table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot notice effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the announcement notice effect selection table for departures. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice re-selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main re-selection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the weight progress effect processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the effect counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows announcement effect selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the re-acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate passage processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a super reach selection table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot super-reach selection table in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram of the departure super-reach selection table in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a pseudo-variation complementing effect selection table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot complementing effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a missed complementary effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change re-selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) disposed on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is regenerated in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball passes through a through gate (also referred to as a second entrance) 67. In this case, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has hit the ordinary symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. You.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and thereafter, an added value after the end of the big hit is given. More specifically, in the “big hit A”, as the added value after the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change) from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. And at the same time, shift to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, in the “big hit B”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a normal symbol time saving state from the end of the big hit to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries as an added value after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is raised, that is, a so-called probable change state of the special symbol (during a probable change of the special symbol). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. Is shown.

  In the present embodiment, if the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends (that is, after the “big hit A” ends), the special symbol change state continues until the next big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given after the special game state ends and the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and after the special symbol lottery ends ten times. May be set to the low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to ten times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be in the normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the “big hit B” ends, but the normal symbol time-saving period is set to 100 times. It is not limited, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 12.1 inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, is being executed, or after the variation is completed. As a stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Done. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of balls that pass through the through gate 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. Specifically, only “0” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 “0 to 9” are determined as the jackpot determination values in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol. Judgment values are specified. If the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A), a special symbol is displayed. Is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8B) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, “big hit A” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 63” and defined. Further, “big hit B” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “64 to 127” and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 20” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 8C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 212” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 8C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol hit is performed. It is determined whether or not there is.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 27). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255), and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 255 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 255). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if the value of the random number matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the first random number table. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 127), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is retained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the value corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 255. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 8A). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/256”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. FIG. 8A). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 256 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “10/256”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 63” is “big hit A”. When the value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 127, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 125 to 127) to stop at the same time, and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., a range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns of “completely out of reach” (for example, in the range of 0 to 115) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the special design holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as large as “0 to 115”, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely out of place”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 125 to 127 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 116 to 124, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64, when the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 101, Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 102 to 124, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out of order reach” is set to 125 to 127.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 256, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table (see FIG. 9A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9B) and an off-state (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9C). And a deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9D).

  First, with reference to FIG. 9B, the fluctuation pattern table for big hits 202d1 will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 63” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “64 to 223” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “224 to 255”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, out of reach is set. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), “0 to 127” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for a long deviation (10 seconds), and “128 to 255”.

  For the out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 191”, and the out-of-reach super-reach in the range of “192 to 254”. (60 seconds), but various special reach types (90 seconds) are set for “255”.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected in the special symbol variation state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "116-127", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 255 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 255). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the right or left through gate 67, and Is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 20". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 16, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/16”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 212”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values of the jackpot is 208 out of the total number of random numbers of 256, and thus the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the first entrance 64 is set to “1 second × 2 times”. It is released. As described above, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the ordinary symbol when the probability is low, and further, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 255), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 27).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, It has at least a flag 203e, a time reduction counter 203f, a jackpot flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is immediately performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is determined based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the lottery result of the special symbol in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to a success / failure, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the special symbol 1 or the RAM 233. The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. From the above, various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or positively varying gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data becomes available in four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area). Of the areas that are present, the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 20 and S405 in FIG. 22). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of spheres of fluctuation display which is managed by the special symbol reservation sphere counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual number of spheres of fluctuation display retained by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 24). ).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e is set to OFF when the initial value is set to OFF, and is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability change jackpot) (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) to determine whether or not the game state is the positive change state (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next big hit game is started. This is set (see S214 in FIG. 20).

  Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 21) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability change flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is on, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability change flag 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time reduction state. When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. At this time, the counter 203f is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B (16R jackpot) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is reduced during the ordinary symbol variation process (see S508, S514, and S519 in FIG. 23). In the special symbol variation process, one is subtracted each time the variation time elapses. (See S217 in FIG. 20). In the normal symbol variation process, even if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, if the above-described probable variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be in the normal symbol time reduction state (S508 in FIG. 23). , S514, S519). Thereby, after the end of the big hit A, it is possible to keep the special symbol positively changing state and the normal symbol time saving state until the next big hit, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, the game can be performed with the goal of being the big hit A as one goal, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The big hit flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is being performed. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203g becomes a jackpot due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the jackpot (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1003 in FIG. 28). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20), the big hit flag 203g is referred to determine whether or not a big hit is being made (see S201 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-mentioned counters (first random number counter C1, first random number counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second random number counter C4). , A second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and an MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers and a return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Have.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 26). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) as the processing at the time of power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the effect random number generation IC 800, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a notice effect selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, based on the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting a mode of the announcement effect executed during the variable display. Here, the notice effect in the present embodiment specifically indicates the degree of expectation according to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Show the production to do. One of three types may be selected as the character. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an elderly character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

  In the case of a boy character, the ratio selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected is higher than other characters, while the ratio selected in the case of a big hit is lower than other characters. Therefore, compared to the case where another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the fluctuation display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation of the big hit is lower.

  On the other hand, in the case of a girl character, the ratio selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected is lower than that of other characters, while the ratio selected in the case of a big hit is lower than other characters. Get higher. For this reason, when the girl character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the variable display, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit.

  In addition, the elderly character is configured to have a higher selection ratio than a girl character and a lower selection ratio than a boy character in the case of a departure. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the selection ratio is higher than the boy character and the selection ratio is lower than the girl character. As a result, the player can be expected to have a big hit as compared with the case where the boy character is displayed. As described above, by changing the type of the announcement effect (character to be displayed) depending on whether or not a jackpot is achieved, it is possible to predict the expectation degree of the jackpot from the announcement effect. That is, before the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the special symbol lottery can be predicted from the content of the notice effect, so that the player's game during the execution of the variable display is prevented from becoming monotonous. (Suppression). Note that the type of the announcement effect is not limited to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, an announcement effect of changing the back image may be executed, or an announcement effect of changing the mode (for example, size, color, or the like) of the changing third symbol may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the announcement effect selection table 222b defines at least a jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 and a release announcement effect selection table 222b2. The jackpot announcement effect table 222b1 is a data table for selecting an announcement effect mode to be executed in the variable display executed when the special symbol lottery is executed, and the miss announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a special symbol. It is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice effect performed in the variable effect performed when the lottery is out.

  First, the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot announcement effect table 222 b 1, the mode of the announcement effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number. Although details will be described later, the effect random number is a random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numerical value (0 to 255) as the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the notice effect A is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “0 to 24”. The announcement effect A is an announcement effect of a mode in which a boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B). As described above, in the case of the change display for the big hit, the boy character is selected. Since the announcement effect A is selected in the change of the jackpot, the unexpected feeling that the jackpot has been achieved despite the announcement effect having a low degree of expectation can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The announcement effect B is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “25 to 99”. The preview effect B is a preview effect in which an elderly character is displayed. As described above, the ratio selected in the case of the variable display with respect to the jackpot is higher than the preview effect A. For this reason, when the notice effect B is displayed, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the big hit. The announcement effect C is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “100 to 249”. This announcement effect C is an announcement effect of a mode in which a girl character is displayed, and is an announcement effect of a type that is most frequently selected in the case of a big hit. For this reason, by displaying the notice effect C, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a big hit.

  On the other hand, "reselection" is associated with the range of the effect random number in the range of "250 to 255". The "reselection" means that the selection of the notice effect is re-executed. In other words, when the value of the effect random number is in the range of “250 to 255”, the effect random number is acquired again from the effect random number generation IC 800 without determining the type of the announcement effect (reproduction of the effect random number). get). Then, the re-acquired effect random number and the jackpot announcement effect effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This “reselection” is repeatedly executed until the value of the effect random number becomes a value (0 to 249) corresponding to any of the announcement effect types. That is, when the value of the effect random number acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is repeatedly performed.

  By associating the re-selection with the range of “250 to 255”, the announcement effect is determined only when the 250 random number values for effect of “0 to 249” are obtained. For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when any of the 25 values “0 to 24” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 10% (25/25). 250). In addition, the notice effect B is selected when any of the 75 values “25 to 99” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 30% (75%). / 250). In addition, the notice effect C is selected when any of the 150 values of “100 to 249” is selected from the 250 values of “0 to 249”, and the probability is 60% (150%). / 250).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, among the 8-bit (256 types) values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used for selection of the announcement effect. That is, the number of decimal numbers that are well-divided (that is, 250) can be used for determining the announcement effect. Therefore, the probability that each announcement effect is selected can be set to a value (10%, 30%, 60%) with a good division (percentage (percentage) of the probability can be converted into an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each announcement effect is selected. Further, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (c), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure will be described. The release announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which, as with the hit announcement effect selection table 222b1, the mode of the announcement effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the notice effect A is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “0 to 149”, and the value of the effect random number is in the range of “150 to 224”. Notice effect B is associated with the notice effect C in the range of “225 to 249”. In addition, “re-select” is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “250 to 255”, as in the jackpot announcement effect effect selection table 222b1.

  For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when it becomes any of the 150 values of “0 to 149” out of the 250 values of “0 to 249”, and the probability of being selected is 60% ( 150/250). In addition, the notice effect B is selected when any one of the 75 values “150 to 224” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 30% (75%). / 250). Further, the notice effect C is selected when any of the 25 values “225 to 249” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 10% (25%). / 250). Therefore, in the case of a miss, the notice effect A is most easily selected as the notice effect type, and the notice effect C is most difficult to be selected. By providing a difference in the selection probabilities, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not a big hit will occur based on the type of the announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, in addition to the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (for example, the variable effect image), another effect image in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. When displaying a preview effect image (for example, a preview effect image), it is configured to select from the preview effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the preview effect to be additionally displayed. By defining the notice effect selection table 222b separately from the change pattern selection table 222a, it is possible to easily select the notice effect to be additionally displayed for the change effect. If the variation effect mode including the notice effect type is defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table 222a increases. For example, when there are 32 types of fluctuation effects and three types of notice effects that can be additionally displayed for each of them, 96 (32 × 3) fluctuation effects are displayed in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. The type must be specified. On the other hand, if the variation pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are separately prepared as in the present embodiment, 35 (32 + 3) types of the change effect and the notice effect can be provided. Therefore, an increase in the capacity of the ROM 222 can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 types) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a value of 10 bits (1024 kinds) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, 1000 values are used for the selection of the announcement effect, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, the lottery is performed again. Is also good. Then, the number of random values (judgment values) may be associated with each effect using 10 as a minimum unit. With this configuration, the percentage can be converted to an integer, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy. Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 7 bits) may be employed. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the announcement effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a notice reselection flag 223e, and a notice reselection counter are stored. 223f, a power-off flag 223y, and at least another memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b after the storage. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1408 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The advance notice reselection flag 223e is a flag indicating whether “reselection” has been determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b. If the notice reselection flag 223e is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the notice effect selection table 222b (notice effect has not been determined), and if it is off, "reselection" has occurred. It means that it has not been decided (the notice effect has been decided). The initial value of the notice reselection flag 223e is set to off, and “reselect” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b in the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of the notice effect. Is set to on (see S1506 in FIG. 33). Further, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), if any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) are determined, or if “reselection” is determined ten or more times in succession, the setting is turned off. (See S1613 in FIG. 34). By referring to the notice reselection flag 223e, when "reselection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, reselection (re-lottery) of the notice effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). Can be performed.

  The notice re-selection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times that the process of selecting again the notice effect type (re-lotting) is continued. Here, the process of re-lotting the notice effect is to acquire a new random number value (judgment value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the determination of “reselection” from the notice effect selection table 222b. This is a process of reselecting the type of the notice effect, and is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, when the process of re-lotting the type of the notice effect is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of re-lotting is terminated, and the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C) are performed. It is configured to execute a different specific notice effect (special notice effect). Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the re-lottery is continuously selected for a long time and the type of the notice effect is not determined. Therefore, any of the preview effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the preview effect.

  The initial value of the notice reselection counter 223f is set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the process of re-lotting the type of the notice effect is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) (see FIG. 34). S1607). In the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) is determined, or “reselection” is determined ten or more times in succession, and the specific notice effect ( When the jackpot confirmation announcement effect and the jackpot expectation large announcement effect) are set, they are initialized to 0 (see S1612 in FIG. 34).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before a power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and power-off processing is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 30). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process (FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1108 in FIG. 29: Yes), a certain time has elapsed since the power-off flag 223y was set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the elapse of (100 milliseconds), that is, a case where there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring the production time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The timer measures the elapsed time from the start of an effect such as a variable effect. Based on the elapsed time measured by the timer, various controls (setting of operations of various accessories, development of effects, etc.) are performed.

  Next, the details of the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The effect random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random value) used for a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the announcement effect to be displayed) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. Since the effect random number generation IC 800 can randomly generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) each time, the determination result can be made random. Therefore, the displayed announcement effect can be determined at random, so that it is difficult to predict the displayed announcement effect. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The effect random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generation unit for generating a random value (random number value) within a range of 8 bits (0 to 255), and stores the random number value generated by the random number generation unit. And at least a random number storage unit. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates a pulse signal at random time intervals. The random number generation unit measures the time interval of the pulse signal generated by the RPG and measures 8 bits (1 byte). And stores it in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit is a specification capable of generating a random number value of 200 megabytes per second (two random number values per 10 μs). That is, the random number value can be updated at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the process for determining the announcement effect is executed. More specifically, when the “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the sound lamp control device 113 produces an effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30). A new random number value is obtained from the random number generation IC 800 for use, and a re-lottery of the announcement effect is performed. The re-lottery of the announcement effect is continuously executed at intervals of 1 millisecond as long as "reselection" is continuously selected from the announcement effect selection table 222b. During this period, one random value is acquired every 1 millisecond. On the other hand, since the random number generation unit is capable of generating two random numbers per 10 μs, even if “reselection” is continuously selected, a new random number value is used each time a re-lottery of the announcement effect is performed. A lottery (re-selection). Therefore, the displayed announcement effect can be determined at random, so that it is difficult to predict the displayed announcement effect. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The random number storage unit is a FIFO (First In First Out) storage device that stores a random number value generated by the random number generation circuit with a predetermined number (for example, 16) as an upper limit. The voice lamp control device 113 can read out the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it for determining the type of the announcement effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO-type storage device, when the reading of the random number value is instructed by the audio ramp control unit 113, the stored timing is changed to the audio random number value which is the earliest in time. Output to the control device 113. Then, the read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. This allows the random number value generated at a different timing to be output from the random number storage unit each time the voice lamp control device 113 instructs to read the random number value. Can be.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of a control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and the access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c includes two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated to the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1701 in FIG. 35) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and outputs one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “「 ”is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 14B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sky stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”. FIG. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 14, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back surface C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, and the rear images of FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process, and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 13A to FIG. 13B). ), And stores image data corresponding to an image between position a and position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 13A and 13B) on the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 15A so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B and 15C and FIGS. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear surface image. be able to.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an effect timing storage area. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the fluctuation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to display. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the performance specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 17 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. This is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 47B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 37B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 37 (b) (see S2009). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 47A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image with respect to. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 18) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 37 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the one-frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 37 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The effect timing storage area 233i displays a timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying a notice effect (notice effects A to C, a jackpot confirmation notice effect, a jackpot expectation large notice effect) for each variation pattern type, and a special notice effect. This is an area for storing the timing to be performed (the value of the pointer 233f). In the present embodiment, when a preview effect or a special advance effect is set, the setting is performed so that the advance effect or the special advance effect is displayed at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i.

  Here, a method of setting a notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a notice effect data table that defines the display content for each notice effect type for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the variable display data table and the like. Then, when the display announcement effect command for notifying the type of the announcement effect is notified from the sound lamp control device 113, the announcement effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time are stored in the display effect table. The variable display data table that is set for this is synthesized. When performing the synthesis, the display contents specified in the announcement effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the announcement effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S2801 in FIG. 43A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S3021 in FIG. 44), and the demo display data table other than the demo display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, and FIG. 41B ) Of S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (determined) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, and FIG. 41B ) Of S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 256, 128, 128, 256 respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol changing process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the probability change flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S215), and the process shifts to S218. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S215, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 If this is the case (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of a fluctuating effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203e, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing the probability change of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is performing the certainty change of the special symbol (that is, the certainty change flag 203e is ON) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301. And a special symbol jackpot random number table for a high probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers of “0 to 9” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the first random number. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, “0”) to be a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the two types of special symbol big hits (big hit A , Jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 63", it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R sure change big hit). B (16R time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 9A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is determined. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115”, complete departure is set. Reach). On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol low probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table, and the stop type is determined. Set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, out of reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 27). Is done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406), and this processing is ended to return to the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. While being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). In the process of S508, if the value of the counter 203f during the time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203e is turned on, it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the time is in the state of saving the time of the ordinary symbol (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the special symbol jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the first entrance 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is not required. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and thus is acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 212”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,213 to 255”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 8C).

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that it is not the normal figure time reduction state (S508: No), the processing shifts to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 255”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 8C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512), and when it is determined that it is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S514). If the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S515). ). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not in the special jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the processing of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The fluctuation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S520 or S521 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is activated. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the pay-out / start-up control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since the processing at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly performed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20) and the start winning process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect or the variable is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 23). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 25 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 26) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening port 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), the big hit flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1004). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1004, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1004: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1007). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls are opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1008, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1010 that it is not the ending start timing (S1010: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1012). In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the end timing is reached (S1012: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot A (S1013). 203e is set to ON (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, in the process of S1013, when it is determined that it is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1013: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process goes to S1016. Transition.

  In the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1016 executed after the processing of S1015 ends, the jackpot flag 203g is set to off, and then this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1217 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), it executes the power-off process in S1217. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1217 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1217. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1104. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1217 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. .

  In the process of S1102, if the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1217, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a checking method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the process of S1105, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1106). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1217 (see S1215 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a temporary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110). The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1108 reaches the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started, for example, after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processes from S1104 to S1106 are performed via S1108. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process skips S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1110, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1110), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1111), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1109 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1104 to S1108 via the process of S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1104. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1211. In the processing of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1202 to S1211 is mainly processing (display), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1212 and the variable display setting processing in S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1208 described later (S1203), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1204). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1207 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1209, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1210 is completed, the notice reselection process for acquiring a new random value (judgment value) and reselecting the notice effect is executed by the decision of “reselection” when the notice effect is determined. (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. The details of the notice reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1212). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Upon completion of the process in S1213, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the information of the occurrence of the power-off is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the flag during the power-off process are set to ON (S1216), and the power is turned off. A disconnection process is performed (S1217). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1218), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1215: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1301). If a variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1307). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball count command has been received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110, (The number of times N of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is held) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). In the process of S1308, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1308, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1308 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1308 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1307 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1309). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1309: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main processing. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1309 (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1311). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Then (S1313), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1311 that the round number command has not been received (S1311: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1314). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S1315), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1314, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1316), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the process of S1407 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then, in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After the data is shifted, a notice effect selection process for selecting a notice effect mode to be displayed in addition to the change pattern (change display) is executed (S1406), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S1407. The details of the announcement effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1407, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1407). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1407: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1408), and then the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) In, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1409). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1409 (S1410), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command and controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the announcement effect selection process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the notice effect selection process (S1406). This announcement effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and an announcement effect to be displayed in addition to the variation display (variation pattern) This is a process for determining the mode of notifying and notifying the display control device 114.

  In the announcement effect setting process (S1406), first, an effect random number value (judgment value) to be used for determining an announcement effect is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The acquired effect random number value is temporarily stored in, for example, a buffer area (effect random number buffer) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S1502), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot (S1502: No), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure (see FIG. 11C). A preview effect is selected (determined) based on the effect random number value (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 11C, when the value of the effect random number (effect counter) is “0 to 149”, the “announcement effect A” is determined as the type of the announcement effect, If the value is “150 to 224”, “announcement effect B” is determined, and if the value is “225 to 249”, “announcement effect C” is determined. On the other hand, if the value is “250 to 255”, “reselect” is determined. As described above, when “reselection” is determined, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, and the type of the notice effect is re-selected. Decide (reselect).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, among the 8-bit (256 types) effect random number values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used for selecting the announcement effect. That is, the number of decimal numbers that are well-divided (that is, 250) can be used for determining the announcement effect. Therefore, the probability that each announcement effect is selected can be set to a value (10%, 30%, 60%) with a good separation (percentage of the probability is converted to an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each announcement effect is selected. Further, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the lottery result is a jackpot (S1502: Yes), the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect stored in the effect random number buffer. The announcement effect is selected (determined) based on the random number value for the effect (effect counter value) (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, when the random number value for effect (effect counter value) is “0 to 24”, the type of the advance effect is “advance effect A”. Is determined, and when the value is “25 to 99”, “notification effect B” is determined as the type of the notification effect, and when the value is “100 to 249”, the type of the notification effect is “ Notice effect C "is determined. On the other hand, if the value is “250 to 255”, “reselect” is determined.

  In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the result of the selection of the notice effect is “reselection” (S1505). Is set (S1507) to notify the display control device 114 of the type of the notification, and the process ends.

  The display announcement production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 sets the display of the notice effect indicated by the display notice effect command by receiving the display notice effect command. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When performing the synthesis, the display contents specified in the notice effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the notice effect start timing specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, when it is determined that “reselection” is determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this processing ends. By setting the notice reselection flag 223e to ON, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, it is possible to newly obtain an effect random number value and determine the type of the notice effect again.

  Next, the notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notice reselection process (S1211). This notice reselection process (S1211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice reselection process (S1211), first, it is determined whether the notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). As described above, the notice reselection flag 223e is a flag that is set to ON when “reselect” is determined when determining the type of the notice effect, and a new effect random number value is obtained by acquiring a new effect random number value. This is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to reselect the effect.

  In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the notice reselection flag 223e is turned off (S1601: No), there is no need to perform the reselection of the notice effect, and thus this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the advance notice reselection flag 223e is ON (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to reselect the advance notice effect (when determining the type of the previous notice effect, "Re-selection" is determined, and the type of the notice effect is not determined). Therefore, in this case, the effect random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1602), and then, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (the variable display for setting the notice effect is for notifying the big hit) (S1603).

  In the process of S1603, if it is determined that the display is not a variable display for notifying a jackpot (S1603: No), a release announcement effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and an effect random number value (effect counter value). Is selected (determined) based on the above (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S1603: Yes), the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect random number value (effect) (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the announcement effect is re-selection (S1606). If the preview effect selection result is not a re-selection (S1606: No), a preview effect command is set based on the preview effect selection result (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  When "reselection" is determined (S1606: Yes) at the time of determining (selecting) the type of the notice effect, 1 is added to the value of the notice reselection counter 223f (S1607), and then the reselection counter is set. Is determined to be 10 or more (S1608). In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1608, if the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more (S1608: Yes), the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, and the identification is different from the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C). (S1609 to S1611) for setting the announcement effect (big hit confirmation advance effect, big hit expectation large advance effect). By stopping the reselection when the number of consecutive reselections becomes 10 or more, "reselection" is continuously selected (determined) endlessly, preventing the type of the notice effect from being determined (suppressed). it can. Therefore, any of the preview effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the preview effect.

  Processing for canceling the re-selection of the advance notice production and setting a specific advance notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, large hit expectation degree large notice effect) different from the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C) (S1609-) In S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (whether the variable display for setting the announcement effect is a variable display for notifying the big hit) (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S1609: Yes), the specific jackpot is indicated as a specific announcement effect (jackpot confirmation announcement effect, jackpot expectation degree large announcement effect), and the jackpot determination is suggested. A display announcement effect command for notifying the announcement effect is set (S1610), and the flow shifts to the process of S1612. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (is out of place) (S1609: No), it is determined as a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation large notice effect). A display announcement effect command for notifying an announcement effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high is set (S1611), and the process shifts to S1612.

  As described above, when the “reselection” is determined continuously for a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific notice effect not specified in the notice effect selection table 222b (a jackpot final notice effect, a large jackpot expectation degree). By setting the notice effect, it is possible to make the player think that an unusual notice effect is displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probability of “reselection” being determined ten times in a row is a very low probability of 6/256 to the tenth power (about 京 K). For this reason, a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation large notice effect) is displayed, so that the player can have more joy.

  In the processing of S1612 executed after the processing of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), the notice reselection flag 223e is turned off (S1613), and the present processing is performed. To end. By the notice reselection processing (see FIG. 34), the notice effect is reselected every millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 30), so that the type of the notice effect is determined without stopping other processing. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the opportunity to cancel the re-selection of the notice effect is set to a case where “re-selection” is performed ten times in a row, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of predetermined times at which “reselection” is selected may be set to be large (for example, 20) or may be set to be small (for example, 5). Alternatively, the predetermined time may elapse (for example, 3 seconds after the first “reselection” is selected).

  In the present embodiment, when the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, a specific notice effect (a jackpot confirmation notice effect, a jackpot expectation large notice effect) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is performed Of course, it may be set so as not to exist.

  In the present embodiment, the re-selection is performed in the selection of the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that re-selection is performed in selecting an effect mode of the effect displayed when the button is pressed (so-called button press effect).

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main process.

  Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1701), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1701) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1801). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1801.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1802, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1802, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1803). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1702 in FIG. 35) (S1805), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1701) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1802. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1801 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then transfers the leading part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1801. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1802, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1703, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1704). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1704, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1705). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B), a simple command is displayed such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. The determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1705, interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1706, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and a processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt processing, various processings corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2002) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2003) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2002), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of the fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2003), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2004). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2003) or the simple display setting process (S2009). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  Next, a drawing process is performed (S2006). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2004), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2005) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2007, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach, complete out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2001: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2008) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2009) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 43, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2002), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2003) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2102). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2103).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2104). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2105), and returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2105) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2201).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2201, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation data longer than the set display data table is actually Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2203), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2204), and both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2205). Upon completion of the process in S2205, a pointer value (the value of the pointer 233f) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this processing ends.

  By storing the execution start timing of the notice effect and the special notice effect in the effect timing storage area 233i, the notice effect data table or the special notice effect data for the address after the stored timing (the value of the pointer 233f). The announcement effect can be easily set simply by adding the specified contents of the table.

  By executing the change pattern command process (see FIG. 39), in the display setting process, the change set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2204. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content is transferred by the process of S2202. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. Normal To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2203, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2104, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2106). If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the stop type command for display (S2301), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is set (S2302).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. The command is set to OFF (S2303), the stop type command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2302. In the above-described task processing (S2004), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2303, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the process of S2302.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S2106, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2106: No), then, it is determined whether there is a display announcement effect command among unprocessed commands (S2108). If there is a display announcement effect command for display (S2108: Yes), an announcement effect command process for setting an announcement effect is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, details of the notice effect command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect command processing. This announcement effect command processing is a process for setting an announcement effect of the type notified by the display announcement effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to set the notice effect (S2401). Here, the timing at which the notice effect can be set specifically means a case where the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start time of the notice effect. That is, if it is temporally before the timing to start the notice effect in the current fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the notice effect can be set in the process of S2401. In order to secure the processing time for setting the notice effect, a predetermined time before the start of the notice effect is set as a reference time, and it may be determined whether the time is earlier than the reference time. . Thus, even if the processing time for setting the notice effect is long, the notice effect setting process is started by the above-described reference time, so that the notice effect setting process is completed by the time the notice effect starts. Can be done.

  In the process of S2401, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: Yes), the notice effect data table corresponding to the type of the notice effect notified by the display notice effect command for display is determined, Data is added to the display data table buffer 233d after the pointer position corresponding to the announcement effect timing (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: No), the re-selection is continuously determined in the notice effect selection process (S1406) of the sound lamp control device 113, for example. This is a case where the timing at which the display announcement effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the announcement effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which a special announcement effect for executing the announcement effect in a special display mode can be set (S2403).

  Here, the timing at which the special notice effect can be set specifically means a case where the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start time of the special notice effect. . That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the special notice effect in the current variation pattern, it is determined that the special notice effect can be set in the process of S2403.

  In the process of S2403, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the special notice effect can be set (S2403: Yes), the special effect data table corresponding to the display notice effect command is determined, and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position is set to the timing corresponding to the timing (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is an effect that executes the notice effect in a special display mode, and is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the notice effect based on the notified notice effect for display (for example, a boy in the center of the screen). Is an effect that is executed in a special display mode different from the effect (for example, an effect in which a boy is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the screen).

  Due to the processing of S2403 and S2404, even if the timing at which the display announcement effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the announcement effect, special effects different from the announcement effects (announcements A to C, specific announcement effects) are made. The special announcement effect can be displayed in a simple display mode. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display announcement effect command is delayed, the special announcement effect can be displayed based on the notified display announcement effect command while avoiding overlapping display with other effects. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the timing is not such that a special announcement effect can be set (S2403: No), the process directly proceeds to S2405. In the process of S2405, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2405), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this notice effect command processing, the notice effect is easily set by synthesizing the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. be able to. At the time of performing the synthesis, for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j, the display specified in the notice effect data table is performed. It is configured to add content. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S2108, if it is determined that there is no display announcement effect command for display (S2108: No), then it is determined whether there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2110: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the opening command processing (S2111) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. In the processing of S2110, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2112). If there is a round number command for use (S2112: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2112, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S2114). If there is an ending command for use (S2114: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2115) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2114 that there is no ending command for display (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2116). If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, upon detecting that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2802. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S2004), if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S2802. From the RAM, the type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2116, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2118). If it is (S2118: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2119) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2118, when it is determined that there is no error command (S2118: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2120), and the process returns to S2101.

  In the processing of S2101 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2102 to S2120 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2101 to S2120 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2008) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39A) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 39B), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2201, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2003), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2004), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2004), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. Therefore, the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2009) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 13 (b) and (c) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2005), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S2008 in FIG. 37 (b)) and a simple display setting processing (see S2009 in FIG. 37 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2003). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505). If the transfer has been completed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in step S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing of S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3509).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3510), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Of the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the ON rear image determination flag is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3509, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the processing of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the above-described drawing process (S2006), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the rendering process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and parameters necessary for rendering each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2004). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 37B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when performing a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the announcement effect to be displayed), the determination is performed again at a predetermined ratio (6/256). (The notice effect is re-selected). The number of determination values corresponding to the reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a perfect number (250). That is, when the probability that each of the determination results (notification effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point).

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform various kinds of lotteries such as a lottery based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning port, a lottery in a mode of a display effect, and the like. In these lotteries, different lottery results are obtained depending on the random number values selected, so that randomness can be given to the lottery results.

  However, since random numbers used for various lotteries are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, the parameter of the lottery is generally a bit unit (power of 2) due to the specifications of the IC. For this reason, when the probability of each lottery result is converted into a percentage, a fraction (below the decimal point) is usually generated. That is, the percentage could not be converted to an integer. For this reason, it may be difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for each lottery result. In addition, even when designing a gaming machine, there is a case where an integer percentage is once set as a probability target, and a process of calculating the number of random numbers that is closest to the set target has been performed. There was a risk of becoming.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a random number for which re-selection is determined is allocated so that the parameter of the probability in the predetermined lottery is 250, which is a multiple of 50, so that a minimum of 2% (1 of the parameter) / 50) The probability of each lottery result can be sorted by the percentage in increments. That is, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be easily converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the lottery result is easily understood intuitively. Further, by converting the percentage of the probability of each lottery result into an integer, the probability of each lottery result can be efficiently designed at the time of design.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 types) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a value of 10 bits (1024 kinds) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values, which are multiples of 100, are used for selecting a notice effect, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, a re-lottery is performed. It may be configured to do so. Then, for each effect, the number of random numbers (judgment values) may be associated with 10 (1/100 of the parameter) as the minimum unit. With this configuration, the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be set by an integer value in increments of 1%, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy to perform. . Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 5 bits) may be adopted. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the announcement effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy. It should be noted that the percentage is not limited to being converted to an integer, but may be of course a unit of 0.1%.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number (so-called hardware random number) generated by the random number generation IC is used as the effect random number value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which a value of a random number (a so-called software random number) generated by software processing is used.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the announcement effect is performed, the reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). However, the lottery that can determine the reselection is the lottery of the advance effect. It is not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that the re-selection is determined at a predetermined ratio also in the lottery when selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Further, the lottery for which re-selection can be determined is not limited to the lottery executed in the sound lamp control device 113. For example, when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, or when a jackpot type is selected, a reselection may be selected at a predetermined rate. With such a configuration, when the probability of a jackpot or the probability of each jackpot type is expressed as a percentage, it can be expressed by an integer value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose specifications are more easily understood.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery for determining the notice effect, if the “reselection” is determined ten times or more, the lottery for determining the notice effect is terminated, and the specific notice effect ( Although the special announcement effect is configured to be executed, the number of times that the lottery is determined to be terminated is not limited to ten, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, by making the number more than ten, it is possible to more reliably determine any of the types of the preview effects (the preview effects A to C). Further, for example, by making the number less than 10, the lottery in the mode of the preview effect can be terminated with a smaller number of determinations even when “re-selection” is determined continuously, so that the preview effect is determined. The time it takes to complete.

  In the present embodiment, the announcement effect previously notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. It is not something that can be done. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 may execute a process for determining a notice effect when it is determined that the start time of the notice effect has come. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. With this configuration, the timing of notifying the type of the notice effect changes according to the number of times “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the notice effect, so that the timing of starting the notice effect can be changed. it can. That is, since not only the type of the notice effect but also the start timing can have a variation, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, in order to have a variation in the timing at which the notice effect is started, when “reselection” is determined, a process of selecting the notice effect again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. You may make it.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when the type of the notice effect is randomly selected in the audio lamp control device 113, the “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). The number of determination values corresponding to “reselection” is set such that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a definite number (for example, a multiple of 50). . That is, when the probability that each of the determination results (notification effects A to C) is determined in the predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), the percentage is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in a part of the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Make up. Thereby, in the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) in the main controller 110, when the probability that each determination result (each variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage), an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point) Becomes

  In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to “re-selection” is continuously obtained and the timing of notifying the variation pattern to the audio ramp control device 113 is delayed, a specific effect (weight elapsed effect) is performed by the audio ramp control device 113. Is configured to be executed. While the “reselection” continues, the lottery result is in an indeterminate state, and thus the fluctuation time is not determined. In other words, the display of the variation pattern cannot be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (weight elapsed effect), the gaming machine can operate normally even if the lottery result is indefinite for a long time (“reselection” continues many times). Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, a game can be performed with confidence.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in the configuration is that the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for general drawing are the input / output of the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the port 205, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is Some changes are made, some processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and an operation is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The point is that a part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a universal figure random number generation IC 901 are provided to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random number values) obtained based on the winning prize. Further, the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number value) obtained based on a ball passing through the through gate 67. That is, instead of the various counters (the first random number counter C1, the first random counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4) stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Thus, a counter value (random number value) used for various lotteries (determinations) executed in the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In the second embodiment, the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (first random number register R1, first random type register R2, stop type selection register R3, and fluctuation type register RS1). I have. These registers have the same role as the random number storage unit of the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment. That is, each register stores the random number value generated by the random number generation unit corresponding to each register, and outputs the random number value to the outside when the instruction to read the random number value is issued.

  The random number value (register value) updated in the first hit random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not a special symbol is a big hit. That is, the register value of the first random number register R1 corresponds to the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). Judgment value). The first random number register R1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. The stored value is updated, for example, twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz). The update frequency of the stored value of the other registers is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of the stored value is different.

  The register value updated in the first hit type register R2 is used to select the special symbol big hit type. That is, the value of the first hit type register R2 corresponds to the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (see FIG. 8B) specified in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). Judgment value). The first hit type register R2 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select the type of stop in the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with a random number value (judgment value) defined in a stop type selection table (not shown) to obtain a special symbol. Is determined (selected). This stop type selection register R3 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). That is, the value of the variation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (determination value) defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C). Value) and the type of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. This variation type selection register RS1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. The random number value (register value) obtained from each register (the first random number register R1, the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the variation type register RS1) of the special figure random number generation IC 900 is a special value. After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. That is, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j stores the first random number counter buffer, the first hit type counter buffer, the stop type selection counter buffer, and the variation type counter buffer among the counter buffers 203y in the first embodiment (FIG. 6). Reference).

  The general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is provided with one type of register (second random number register R4). The register value updated in the second random number register R4 is normally used to determine whether or not a symbol has been hit. In other words, the value stored in the second random number register R4 corresponds to the second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and the random number specified in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (judgment value) to judge whether or not it is a normal symbol hit. The second random number register R4 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255.

  The random number value (register value) obtained from the second random number register R4 of the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is temporarily stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k, and then stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area. The data is transferred to an empty area 203b. That is, the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second random number counter buffer in the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the various determinations performed by the main controller 110 are determined by the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for ordinary figure provided outside the main controller 110. (Hardware random number). With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a random number generating IC (a random number generating IC for special figure 900 and a random number generating IC for general figure 901) whose random number value is updated (generated) twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update (generate) a random number value when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC may be used. Thus, the number of times the random number value is updated (generated) in the random number generation IC can be minimized, and power consumption can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a random number generation IC (a random number generation IC 900 for a special figure and a random number generation IC 901 for a general figure) capable of acquiring a random number value that is a random value every time it is updated (generated) is used. It is not limited to. For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates the value one by one at short time intervals (for example, 1 μs), the timing at which the value is obtained from the random number generation IC becomes irregular. Naturally, it may be acquired.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52A, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. Further, instead of the counter buffer 203y, a special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and a general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

  The main reselection counter 203h is a counter that indicates the number of times “reselection” has been continuously selected in a predetermined determination (determination of a variation pattern) performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 and the fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c)), Is configured to select “reselect” at the ratio (6/256). When this “reselection” is selected, a random number value (the value of the fluctuation type counter RS1) used for determining the fluctuation pattern, similarly to the case where “reselection” is selected at the time of selecting the notice effect in the first embodiment. Is newly obtained, and the variation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined again based on the new random number value. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be determined quickly because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without performing other processing to determine the variation pattern (variation time). I do. However, if the “reselection” continues too many times, the period during which other processes (eg, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes long, and for example, the start winning can be detected. Or the passage of the through gate 67 may not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), Is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then acquire the value of the variation type register RS1 again to execute a process of determining a variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  The initial value of the main reselection counter 203h is set to 0, and “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the value (see S333 in FIG. 56). “Reselection” is determined four times or more consecutively, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is temporarily interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the variation pattern table 202d, which is a data table in which “reselection” is associated with a part of the random number value (judgment value), will be described. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to select a variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, but its definition is changed from that of the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, “reselection” is associated with some determination values (random numbers) in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the present embodiment. In addition, the distribution of the determination value (random value) to another determination result is changed by allocating the determination value (random value) to “reselection”.

  Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 24” as the determination value, and the fluctuation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds) is within the range of “25 to 174”. The variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “175 to 249”. Then, “reselection” is associated with the remaining determination values of “250 to 255”. By setting the number of determination values (random number values) for determining “reselection” to be six from “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach ( 90 seconds) can be set to 250 (0 to 249). 1% is equivalent to 2.5 random number values (judgment values) (250/100), so if a random number value (judgment value) is assigned with 5 (2%) as the minimum unit, the probability percentage Can be an integer value.

  In this embodiment, 25 (5 × 5) determination values of “0 to 24” are assigned to various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “25 to 174” of various types of super reach (60 seconds). 150 (5 × 30) determination values are allocated, and 75 (5 × 15) determination values “175-249” are allocated to various special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability of selecting various types of normal reach is 10% (2% × 5), the probability of selecting various types of super reach (60 seconds) is 60% (2% × 30), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) Is 30% (2% × 15). That is, random numbers (judgment values) are assigned so that the percentage of the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected becomes an integer value. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the generation of a fraction (decimal point) in the percentage, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having more easily understandable specifications. Also, at the time of design, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probabilities of the respective determination results.

  Similarly, the random number value (judgment value) of the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53 (b)) and the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 53 (c)) are similar. “Reselection” is associated with the range of “250 to 255”. That is, the configuration is such that the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when the value becomes 250 (0 to 249) of the 256 random values (judgment values). In addition, the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern is set to be a multiple of 5, thereby making the percentage of the probability that each variation pattern (variation time) is selected be an integer. This makes it possible to set the probability to a value that is easier to understand, regardless of whether it is a jackpot or a miss.

  Returning to FIG. 52 (a), the description will be continued. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” is continuously determined a predetermined number of times (four times) in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time). If the main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined four or more times in succession, and if it is off, it means that the number of times of "reselection" is less than four times. means. In the main reselection process (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59), and the main reselection flag 203i is referred to. If the selection flag 203i is on, a process for acquiring a new random value from the variation type register RS1 and determining a variation pattern (variation time) (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) is executed.

  The special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and the ordinary figure counter temporary storage area 203k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing the register values instead of the counter buffer 203y as described above (FIG. 51). reference). Each random number value (register value) acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j, and then transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a. Further, the random number value (register value) acquired from the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k and then transferred to an empty area of the normal symbol retaining sphere storing area 203b.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment in that a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h are added.

  The weight measurement counter 223g ends the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation pattern) ends in a state where at least one fluctuation is suspended (the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more). This is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the start. The weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by 1 in the weight progress effect processing (see FIG. 63) from the reception of the stop command in a state where the number of reserved balls is 1 or more until the next fluctuation display is started. . Since the wait progress presentation process (see FIG. 63) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp control device 113, the weight measurement counter 223g sets 1 for every 1 millisecond. Is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to in the weight progress effect processing (see FIG. 63) (see S4205 in FIG. 63), and a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed since the previous fluctuation was completed. If the next change that is suspended is not started even after the lapse of time (a change pattern command is not output from main controller 110), a specific effect (weight elapse effect) is executed (FIG. 63). S4206).

  Here, the case where the fluctuation pattern command is not output from main controller 110 even after the lapse of the predetermined period means the case where it takes time for the main controller 110 to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). And so on. That is, in the process of determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d, “reselection” is determined continuously, a new random value (judgment value) is obtained from the variation type register RS1, and specified in the variation pattern table 202d. This is the case, for example, when the process of comparing with the determined determination value is repeated endlessly. If the variation pattern (variation time) is not determined, the variation pattern command cannot be set from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, so that the more the "reselection" is repeated, the more the previous variation ends. After that, the period until the next fluctuation is started becomes longer. In this case, if the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to wait until the variation pattern command is received, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Nevertheless, since the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without starting the next variation after the previous variation pattern (variation display) ends, a specific effect (weight (Progressive effect). As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, so that the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally even if the next fluctuation effect is not started. it can. In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  The weight measurement flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the previous change has been completed and the change pattern command has not been notified in a state where the number of reserved balls is one or more. That is, it indicates whether or not it is a period in which the time measurement (count) by the weight measurement counter 223g is executed. If the weight measurement flag 223h is on, it means that the previous fluctuation effect has been completed and the next fluctuation pattern command has not been notified, and during this time, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed. Every time this is done, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223h is off, the wait control counter 223g is not updated because it is not a period of waiting for the main controller 110 to notify the variation pattern command. The weight measurement flag 223h is set to ON when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 and a pending ball exists (S1335 in FIG. 62). In addition, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, it is set to off (see S1332 in FIG. 62). The weight measurement counter 223g can be accurately updated by the weight measurement flag 223h.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, similarly to the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19). This is a periodic process that is executed.

  Of the timer interrupt processing 2 in the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 are steps S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And S109 are executed.

  In the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20), the start winning process (see FIG. 22), and the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. ), A special symbol change process 2 (S104), a start winning process 2 (S105), and a through gate passage process 2 (S107) are respectively executed. Details of each of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 is completed, the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time) (special symbol variation start process 2) is performed a predetermined number of times (four times). When the reselection is determined, the main reselection process, which is a process for determining a variation pattern (variation time), is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. Details of the main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is a process of displaying a variation of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, similarly to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) of the second embodiment, S201 to S207 and S209 to S218 respectively include S201 to S207 and S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S218 to S218 is executed. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the variation is not in progress in the process of S202 (S202: No), a predetermined time has elapsed since the last stop display of the third symbol. It is determined whether (one second) has elapsed (S231), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in the process of S231 (S231: Yes), each process of S203 to S208 is executed. In the process of S208 in the present embodiment, a special symbol change start process 2 (S208) is executed instead of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol change start process 2 (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol change start process 2 (S208) is similar to the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. ”Or“ missing special symbol ”(determination of success or failure) and determine the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. It is processing for.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S301 to S311 are the same as the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment (S301 to S311). The same processing is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the process of S307 or S309 is completed, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to (c)) is obtained in the process of S307 or S309. It is determined whether “reselection” is determined (selected) based on the value of the variation type register RS1 (S331). Then, when it is determined that “reselection” is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is newly acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S332), and the main reselection is performed. One is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334). If the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute the process again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S334, when it is determined that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is temporarily terminated, and the main reselection flag 203i is reset. It is set to ON (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S336), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that “reselection” has been determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. By the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern can be determined, and when "reselection" is determined, the reselection of the variation pattern can be repeated. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be determined quickly because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without performing other processing to determine the variation pattern (variation time). I do. However, if the “reselection” continues too many times, the period during which other processes (eg, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes long, and for example, the start winning can be detected. Or the passage of the through gate 67 may not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), Is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then acquire the value of the variation type register RS1 again to execute a process of determining a variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  Next, the start winning process 2 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing start winning processing 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

  In the start winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes in S401 to S405 are the same as those in S401 to S405 in the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  In the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the first random number register R1 The values of the first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900, stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process proceeds to S402. .

  In the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 is completed, each value of the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (S432), this process ends. By the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 can be acquired and used for a special symbol lottery. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, a through gate passage process 2 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. In the through gate passage process 2 (S107), similarly to the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if a ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending a random number value used for a normal symbol winning lottery.

  In each of the through gate passing processes 2 (S107), in the processes of S601 to S604, the same processes as the respective processes of S601 to S604 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are respectively executed. . In the through gate passage process 2 (S107) of the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the second random number register R4 is changed. It is obtained from the general-purpose figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k (S631), and the process proceeds to S602.

  In the through gate passage process 2 (S107) in this embodiment, when the process of S604 is completed, the value of the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the free space of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The process is stored (S632), and the process ends. Through the through gate passage process 2 (see FIG. 58), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 can be acquired and used for lottery of ordinary symbols. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main reselection processing (S131) is one of the timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the special symbol change start processing 2 (see FIG. 56). In the process for determining the variation pattern of the above, when the “reselection” is determined four or more consecutive times, the process for selecting the variation pattern based on the determination of the “reselection” for the fourth and subsequent times is performed. is there.

  In the main reselection process (S131), first, it is determined whether the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 2. If the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S4102), and the jackpot lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 are obtained. Then, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the above (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is “reselection” (S4104). If the determined variation pattern is a re-selection (S4104: Yes), the process is terminated. As described above, when “re-selection” is determined from the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the process is terminated while the main re-selection flag 203i is kept on, so that the next timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) In the main reselection process (S131) executed in (1), the process of reselecting the variation pattern can be performed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the determined variation pattern is not a re-selection (S4104: No), a variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern determined in the process of S4103 (S4105), and the setting is performed. A stop type command is set based on the displayed display mode (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to off (S4107), and this processing ends.

  Next, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. The main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is similar to the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, in which the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 executes main control of the game. Processing.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915, the processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is abolished (deleted). In the present embodiment, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 is used for various lotteries, and it is not necessary to generate a random number value by software. Steps S910 and S911 are eliminated. This is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, except that these processes are abolished. As described above, in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, a random number value is generated by software by using the random number generation IC (the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for ordinary figure). (S902, S910, and S911) can be unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 61, main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. In the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61), in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218, the same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, after executing the processes of S1201 to S1210, a later-described wait progress effect process is executed (S1231). Although the details will be described later, in the weight progress effect processing (S1231), a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed without starting the next change since the previous change pattern (change display) has been completed. In this case, the process is for setting a specific effect (weight effect effect).

  After the execution of the wait progress effect (S1231), a command determination process 2 (S1212) is performed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the processes after S1213 are performed. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. The command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment determines a command received from the main control device 110 and performs a command corresponding to the command type, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing control.

  In the command determination processing 2 (S1212) of the second embodiment, the processing of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 is performed in each of the processing of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing is performed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off. (S1332), this processing ends.

  In the command determination process 2 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1307 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1307: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333). ). If the stop command has been received (S1333: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a reserved ball based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S1334), and there is a reserved ball (that is, the special symbol reserved). When it is determined that the value of the ball counter 203c is 1 or more (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off (S1335), and this processing ends. Also, in the processing of S1334, if it is determined that there is no pending ball (S1334: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  By setting the weight measurement flag 223h to ON for the retained ball, the previous variation is completed, and the state in which the variation pattern command is not received despite the presence of the reserved ball is counted (timed). be able to. In this embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (weight effect effect) is executed. Thus, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. Can be recognized by the player.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1333 that the stop command has not been received (S1333: No), the processing of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination processing 2 ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the weight progress effect processing (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the weight progress effect processing (S1231). The weight progress effect processing (S1231) is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect) as described above.

  In the weight progress effect processing (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the weight measurement flag 223h is turned on (S4201). In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), the processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is ON (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is set to 3000. It is determined whether it is greater than (S4203). In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that three seconds or more have elapsed since the previous variation pattern (variation display) was completed. I do. That is, it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received even though the time sufficient to receive the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 has passed. It is highly possible that a failure pattern command output from the main control device 110 could not be normally received due to a failure of the 110 or a failure abnormality (such as disconnection) such as a harness). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for notifying the player or the hall of the occurrence of the error is set (S4204), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is equal to or less than 3000 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205). If it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the variation pattern command is issued despite the fact that 50 milliseconds have elapsed since the one second symbol stop period has elapsed. Means that it has not been received. That is, when the main controller 110 selects the fluctuation pattern (variation time), it is highly likely that “reselection” is continuously determined and the determination of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display weight progress effect command for setting display of a specific effect (weight progress effect) is set (S4206), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), the process ends.

  The display weight progress effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 (S1202). Are transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display announcement command, the display control device 114 displays a specific effect (weight progress effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed, despite the number of reserved balls being 1 or more, the weight elapse effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the wait elapsed time effect is not executed even if the fluctuation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed. Is also good. More specifically, if it is known in advance that the next change is a change to be a big hit, for example, by performing a look-ahead of the jackpot determination result, the wait progression effect may not be executed. As a result, the player once feels uncomfortable that the variable display is not started even though the number of reserved balls is 1 or more. Can be impressed as if it was a precursor to a jackpot. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the predetermined ratio (6/256) is determined in the predetermined determination (determination for determining the fluctuation pattern) of the main control device 110 that executes the main control related to the game. ) To select “reselect”. The number of determination values corresponding to the reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a perfect number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, the percentage is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point). Accordingly, when the probability of each determination result is expressed as a percentage, the value becomes a more easily understood value, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which specifications and the like can be more easily understood.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a fluctuating effect is started based on a winning of a game ball to a starting port. If the prize is not suspended, the variable production starts immediately after the prize is won (for example, within one second), and if the prize is suspended, immediately after the completion of the variable production based on the prize immediately before the suspension. (Eg, within one second).

  However, if the fluctuating effect does not start immediately after the end of the fluctuating effect based on the winning or after the winning immediately before the holding, the game will not be started even though it is usually the timing to start the game, There is a risk that the player will be distrusted.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reselection is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in the process of determining the fluctuation pattern of the main control device 110. For this reason, if “reselection” is determined continuously, the fluctuation pattern is not determined during that period, and the period from the end of one variable display to the start of the next variable display is long. As a result, the above-described problem occurs.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the fluctuation pattern command of the predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed despite the fact that the number of reserved balls is one or more. When not performed, a specific effect (weight effect effect) is executed. Thus, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. Can be recognized by the player. In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more, a specific effect (weight elapsed effect) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When "reselection" is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as a result of the lottery of the variation pattern, a specific effect (weight effect effect) may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the weight progress effect (the effect of shining the symbol) is executed when 1050 milliseconds have elapsed since the previous stop of the fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern command is not received, the fluctuation of the symbol may be started. As a result, the next fluctuation is started at the latest 1050 ms after the last symbol stop, so that the state of the symbol stop can be prevented (suppressed) from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game with ease without feeling uncomfortable.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment is configured to acquire random numbers used for performing lottery (decision) of the type of the announcement effect one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800 at the time of executing the lottery. Was.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values are acquired in advance from the random number generation IC 800 for effect, stored in the RAM 223, and the announcement effect is generated using the stored random value. Is executed. When a random number value is acquired in advance, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a random number value that is “re-lottery” (that is, a random number value in the range of “250 to 255”). Is configured to be stored in the RAM 223 only with respect to the random numbers for which is not determined (that is, random numbers in the range of “0 to 249”). That is, the value corresponding to “re-lottery” is discarded without being stored in the RAM 223. Accordingly, when the lottery (decision) process of the preview effect is actually performed, the “re-lottery” is not determined, and the determination of the preview effect is delayed due to the continuous “re-lottery”. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in configuration in that the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 for measuring the current time, and the audio ramp control The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 can measure the current time. The sound ramp control device 113 can acquire the time measured by the RTC 292. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when power is turned on (when a predetermined number (100) of random numbers are not stored in the RAM 223), a predetermined random number is produced in the RAM 223. It is configured to read from the counter initial value table 222c and store it. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random numbers stored in the RAM 223. In the present embodiment, different combinations of random numbers are set as initial values according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292. Thereby, the random number value set as the initial value can be made a more random value while quickly determining the initial value of the random number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65A, a description will be given of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter initial value table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. The effect counter initial value table 222c is a data table used to select an initial value of a random number value that is referred to when selecting a notice effect. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random numbers selectable as initial values are defined. All random numbers specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are in the range of “0 to 249”. That is, the random value set as the initial value is a random value outside the range of the random value for which “reselection” is determined (that is, “250 to 255”). Thereby, when selecting the type of the announcement effect, the type can be selected without selecting “reselection”, so that the processing time for determining (selecting) the announcement effect can be shortened.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the initial value is selected with reference to the effect counter initial value table 222c. The selected initial value is stored in an effect counter storage area 223i described later.

  Details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the prescribed contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect counter initial value table 222c, ten combinations (array Nos. 1 to 100) of 100 random numbers are defined (table Nos. 1 to 10). In the present embodiment, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on power-on, One of the tables 1 to 10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In addition, No. When acquiring any one of the tables 1 to 10, a table corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, if the last digit of the number of seconds in the power-on time is 1, the No. 1 is acquired, and if the last digit is 2, the table No. 1 is obtained. Two tables are obtained. Similarly, if the last digit is 3, the No. No. 3 if the last digit is 4 No. 4 if the last digit is 0 Ten tables are selected. Thereby, a combination of random numbers different each time can be set as an initial value in accordance with the timing of turning on the power, so that the type can be determined more randomly when determining (selecting) the announcement effect.

  The number of tables and the number of arrays in each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be 15 patterns or 5 patterns. The number of arrays may be 150 or 50.

  The method of selecting a table according to the current time is not limited to the method described above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of the millisecond of the power-on time. Thus, even when the power is turned on to a plurality of gaming machines at the same time, the tables selected by the respective gaming machines can be made different (a random value is set for each gaming machine).

  In the present embodiment, the table is selected according to the current time measured by the RTC 292, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection may be made according to the measurement results (temperature, humidity, light quantity, volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or the measurement results may be combined and selected. Further, the selection may be made based on the random number value generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number value may be generated by software processing and selected based on the random number value.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 223 in the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. I have.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing an effect counter value (an effect random number value) used when determining (selecting) a notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b. It consists of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. Each storage area stores one random number value (random value for effect) used to determine the type of the announcement effect. As for the random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 each time one random number value is used for selection of the announcement effect. The obtained random number value is overwritten on the storage area storing the random number value used for selecting the announcement effect (see S4305 in FIG. 69). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which 100 random number values generated at different timings are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  The acquisition pointer 223j is a pointer indicating which one of the 100 random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is to be selected. When selecting the type of the announcement effect, the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, the effect random number value is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the judgment value specified in the announcement effect selection table 222b is determined. The type of the announcement effect is determined based on the (random value). The value of the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by one each time a random number value of 1 is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223i in order to determine the type of the announcement effect. Thereby, the effect random number can be set to a more random value.

  The reacquisition flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (ie, a range of “250 to 255”). If the reacquisition flag 223k is on, it means that the acquired effect random number value is a value corresponding to “reselection”, and it is necessary to acquire the effect random number value from the effect random number generation IC 800 again. I do. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not necessary to re-acquire the effect random number value. The reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (S4304 in FIG. 69). In addition, when the value within the range of “0 to 249” is acquired by reacquiring the effect random number value, the value is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 67, start-up processing 3 in the sound lamp control device according to the third embodiment will be described.

  In the start-up processing 3 of the third embodiment, in each of the steps S1101 to S1111, the same processing as each of the steps S1101 to S1111 of the start-up processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment is executed. In the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 is completed, next, time information corresponding to the current time is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the obtained time information. Then, from the effect counter initial value table 222c, a combination of initial values for 100 effect random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected and stored in the effect counter initial value table 222c (initial value is set) (S1132). ). When the processing in S1132 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S1111.

  In the start-up process 3, by selecting a combination of initial values prescribed in the ROM 222 in advance and setting the combination in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect random number generation IC 800 sets one initial value of the effect random number. The initial value of the effect random number can be determined more quickly than in the case of acquiring one. Therefore, it is possible to shift to a state in which the player can execute the game earlier.

  Next, the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218 in the respective processings of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1218 to S1218 is executed.

  In the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, when the random number value for effect stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i is updated, it corresponds to “reselection”. When the effect random number value has been acquired, the effect random number value is acquired again, and a reacquisition process for updating the effect counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to S1212 and thereafter. The details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 69, a description will be given of a preview effect selection process 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment. This announcement effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) instead of the announcement effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and is performed in the first embodiment. Similar to the announcement effect selection process in the embodiment (see FIG. 33), this is a process for selecting the type of the announcement effect from the effect random number value generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying the display control device 114 of the selection.

  In the announcement effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, among the 100 effect random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect randomness stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j. A numerical value is obtained (S4301). Next, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new effect random number value (S4302), and the acquired register value is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”). It is determined whether or not there is (S4303).

  In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the acquired register value (the random number value for effect) is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, re-acquisition of the effect random number value is set (S4304), and the flow shifts to the process of S4306. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the register value obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 is outside the range of “reselection” (that is, within the range of “0 to 249”) (S4303: No) Then, the acquired register value is stored as a new effect random number value in a storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. I do.

  In the process of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether or not the updated value of the acquisition pointer 223j is greater than 100 (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is greater than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquisition pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process shifts to S4309. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is equal to or less than 100 (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4309.

  In the process of S4309, it is determined whether or not the variable effect for setting the notice effect is a variable effect for notifying the jackpot (whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot) (S4309). If it is determined that there is a notification effect (S4309: Yes), the announcement effect is determined based on the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect random number (effect counter) acquired in the process of S4301. The type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4309 that the hit is not a jackpot (S4309: No), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure (see FIG. 11C) and the effect random number value acquired in the process of S4301 ( Effect counter), a preview effect is selected (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S4312), and this process ends.

  Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this re-acquisition process (S1261) is performed when the effect random number value corresponding to “re-selection” is acquired when updating the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i. This is a process for acquiring the effect random number value again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In this reacquisition process (S1261), first, it is determined whether or not the reacquisition flag is set to 223k on (S4401). To end. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the reacquisition flag 223k is ON (S4401: Yes), a register value (effect random number value) is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S4402). Next, it is determined whether or not the register value acquired in the process of S4402 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, “250 to 255”) (S4403), and a value corresponding to “reselection” is determined. If this is the case (S4403: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the acquired register value is out of the range of “reselection” (that is, “0 to 249”) (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read, The register value (random number for effect) acquired in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to off (S4405), and this processing ends.

  By this re-acquisition processing (S1261), only the effect random number value outside the range of “reselection” can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i from the effect random number generation IC 800, so that the effect is selected when the notice effect is selected. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect random number value read from the counter storage area 223i from becoming a value corresponding to “reselection”. Therefore, any of the types of the preview effects (notification effects A to C) can be always selected (determined) by the process of selecting one preview effect, so that the processing time can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of effect random number values are stored in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in advance. The lottery (decision) of the announcement effect is executed using the effected random number value for the effect. By storing a plurality of (100) random numbers in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the random number values are not stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, so that each announcement effect is determined. Determination (determination) can be performed normally in the processing for this. In addition, each time the stored random number value is used for determining the announcement effect, the used random number value is discarded, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800, and the effect counter storage area 223i is overwritten. Is configured. By sequentially overwriting (updating) the contents, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the same random number value from being repeatedly used for determination, and thus it is possible to ensure the randomness of the effect random number value.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is controlled to store only a value outside the range of the random value for which “reselection” is determined (that is, a random value in the range of “0 to 249”). . With this configuration, if one random number value is acquired from a predetermined number of random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the type of the advance effect can be determined by executing only one announcement effect determination. (That is, any of the announcement effects A to C can be determined without determining “reselection”). Therefore, the time required for the process of determining the type of the announcement effect can be reduced, so that the type of the announcement effect can be reliably notified to the display control device 114 by the start timing of the announcement effect.

  In this embodiment, the initial value of the effect random number stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222, and the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67). Is configured to transfer any combination of the initial values specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c to the effect counter storage area 223i. In addition, all the effect random numbers specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values (“0 to 249”) within a range of any determination result (any of the announcement effects A to C is determined). (Value within the range). With this configuration, the time required to store the initial values in the effect counter storage area 223i can be reduced as compared with the case where the initial values are obtained one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800. When the configuration is such that the initial values are acquired one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800, every time a random number value is acquired, it is determined whether or not the value corresponds to “reselection”, and “reselection” is performed. This is because it is necessary to newly acquire a random number value until a random number value within a range (within a range of “0 to 249”) that results in any of the determination results is obtained. By shortening the time for storing the predetermined number (100) of the initial values of the effect random numbers in the effect counter storage area 223i, it is possible to shorten the period until the pachinko machine 10 can play a game.

  In the present embodiment, 100 random numbers are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. However, the number is not limited to 100 and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value (so-called hard random number value) generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 is stored in the effect counter storage area 223i in a predetermined number (100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a configuration may be made in which a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random number values generated by software processing (so-called software random number values) are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Generally, the random number value of the software is added one by one in the processing of the software. Therefore, when the value of the software random number is acquired again in order to re-select the lottery result, there is a high possibility that the random number value has not been sufficiently updated. That is, a random value that is a random value cannot be obtained. Thus, by storing the random number value in the effect counter storage area 223i in advance as in the present embodiment, a random number value that is a random value can be obtained even when the lottery result is re-drawn.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, when a winning start is detected, various kinds of information (various counter values) used for a lottery of a special symbol are obtained, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. Is detected, the information (the value of the second random number counter C4) used for the lottery of the normal symbol is acquired. In other words, different acquisition operations are performed depending on whether a winning start is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all random numbers are collectively acquired and detected when the start winning is detected or when the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. Is used for a lottery (judgment) in accordance with the random number. By adopting a configuration in which random numbers are read in a lump regardless of whether the winning is the start or the passing through the through gate 67, the random number obtaining operation can be performed in debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10. Can be checked together.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in configuration is that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are provided in the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the output port 205, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and a partial process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is a change from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a universal figure random number generation IC 901 are provided to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 and the ordinary figure random number generation IC 901 are the same as the ICs having the same names provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, various counter values in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in the present embodiment, the values of the registers (the first random number register R1, the first random type register R2, and the stop type) are provided in the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901. The type selection register R3, the fluctuation type register RS1, and the value of the second random number register R4 are used as random numbers (first random number counter C1, first first type counter C2, and stop type selection in the first embodiment). The counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4) are acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. These counter values are collectively acquired from each IC at the same timing and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

  When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the start winning, the first random number register R1 and the first random number register R1 out of the stored register values (random number values). Each value of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the ball entering the through gate 67, the value of the second random number register R4 is normally stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Is stored in an empty area.

  Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value, the configuration is such that the values (random number values) of all the registers are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Can be omitted to determine whether a value (random number value) should be obtained by specifying the register value, so that the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) or the like in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the acquisition operation of the random number value (register value) can be collectively confirmed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Also, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided instead of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment.

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203n is a continuous number of times that the collective acquisition of various register values based on the passage of the through gate 67 has been performed (that is, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is continuously performed without performing the random selection of the special symbol). This is a counter for counting the number of times that the number has been increased. As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter values (register values) used for the lottery of the special symbol and the lottery of the ordinary symbol are configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition trigger. For this reason, it is intentionally caused to pass through the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily satisfied, and the first random number (register value) used for the lottery of the jackpot among the acquired random number values (register value) There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 is illegally analyzed from outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, it is analyzed from the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900 to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally allocated. . In order to prevent this misconduct, in the present embodiment, the number of times a ball continuously passes through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. This makes it possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the jackpot is obtained and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot.

  The initial value of this special figure continuous clear counter 203n is set to 0, and in the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75), of the counter values (register values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Each time the value of the second random number register R4 is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the value is incremented by one (see S664 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), various counter values (register values) used for the lottery of special symbols are initialized to 0 each time they are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (see FIG. 74). See S463).

  As described above, the counter temporary storage area 203p is a storage area for temporarily storing the register values (random number values) obtained from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901. The various register values (random numbers) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p are stored in a corresponding storage area (special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b) according to the timing of acquiring the value. ).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 74, start winning processing 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. This start winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  In the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S401 to S405 are the same as the processes in S401 to S405 in the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The processing is executed. In the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, after executing the process of S401, the respective values of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are specially mapped. It is obtained from the random number generation IC 900 for general use and the random number generation IC 901 for general drawing, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S461).

  Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, when the process of S405 ends, the first random number register R1 and the first type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461. Then, each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S462). Next, after the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process 4 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 4 in the fourth embodiment. This through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

  In the through gate passage processing 4 (S107), in each processing of S601 to S604, the same processing as each processing of S601 to S604 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. In the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), then the first random number register R1 , The first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are respectively obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. (S661).

  In the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when the processing in S604 ends, the second random number register R4 of the various register values stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the processing in S661. Is stored in the first area of the free symbol storage area 203b of the normal symbol storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (first storage area to fourth storage area) (S662). Then, each register value stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n is not 10 or more (S665: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666), and this processing ends.

  In this way, by configuring so as to notify an error when the normal symbol lottery is executed 10 or more times in succession, the register values of the register values acquired collectively upon passing through the through gate 67 can be obtained. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an illegal act of analyzing the value of the first random number register R1. More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery is configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition trigger. . For this reason, it is intentionally caused to pass through the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily satisfied, and the first random number (register value) used for the lottery of the jackpot among the acquired random number values (register value) There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 is illegally analyzed from outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, it is analyzed from the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900 to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally allocated. . In order to prevent this misconduct, in the present embodiment, the number of times a ball continuously passes through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. This makes it possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the jackpot is obtained and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all register values (random number values) are collectively collected when a winning start is detected or when passing through the through gate 67 is detected. The information is acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, and is transferred to a storage area (either the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) according to the detected content. . Regardless of the trigger for obtaining the register value (random number value), all register values (random number values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, so that when register values are obtained, Since the process of determining whether a value (random value) should be obtained by designating a register can be omitted, the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the acquisition operation of the register value (random number value) can be collectively confirmed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 19) executed at a specific occasion of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the start winning of the game ball and the passage through the through gate 67 are performed. Detected. When a winning start is detected, the register values of the random number generating ICs (the random number generating IC 900 for special figure and the random number generating IC 901 for ordinary figure) are acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74). Is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC is acquired in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75). Here, as for each register value in each random number generation IC, the random number value stored twice at a frequency of 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is updated. This update interval (time) is obtained after the register value (random number value) of each random number generation IC is obtained in the start winning processing 4 (see FIG. 74), and then in the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75). Is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random value) is obtained. As a result, in the same timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), even when the starting prize of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the register values (based on the starting prize) respectively obtained. It is possible to make the register value (random value) different from the register value (random value) obtained based on the passage through the through gate 67.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC is used in which the random number value stored at a frequency of twice every 10 μs (a period of 200 kHz) is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update the random number value at the timing when the random number value is obtained from main controller 110 may be used. That is, a random number generation IC that can generate a random number value at an arbitrary timing may be used. Thereby, the frequency of updating and generating the random number value can be minimized, and the power consumption can be reduced. Further, the random number generation IC 900 having a different update timing from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the ordinary figure random number generation IC 901 may be used. For example, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is updated at a frequency of 1 μs (1 MHz cycle), and the general figure random number generation IC 901 is updated at a frequency of 2 μs (500 kHz cycle). It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generating IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generating IC 901 are used as the random number generating ICs so that the random number values to be generated can be collectively obtained. It is not limited to two types. The number of random number generation ICs may be more than three or one. For example, one type of random number generation IC is used, that is, the random number generation ICs are integrated into one. Accordingly, in the process of collectively obtaining each random number value from the random number generation IC, each random number value is accessed only by accessing one random number generation IC, compared to obtaining each random number value from a plurality of random number generation ICs. They can be acquired at once, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the start winning processing 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through gate passing processing 4 (see FIG. 75), when the condition for obtaining the random number value (register value) is satisfied, the special figure random number is set. The configuration is such that all random number values (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are collectively acquired.

  In addition to this, in the present modification, when a condition for obtaining a random number value is satisfied, the acquisition of a random number value (register value) and the storage of the random number value are executed in the same one process (winning process). It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. Further, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( (Register value) can be used to store the corresponding random numbers, thereby reducing the processing load.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing 5 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment. Note that the same parts as those of the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the timer interrupt processing 5, similarly to the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), first, the switch read processing of S101 is executed, and then the winning processing is executed (SS161). Next, a special symbol variation process is executed (S104), a normal symbol variation process is executed (S106), a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed. (S109), the timer interrupt processing 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a prize-winning process (161) which is one of the timer interrupt processes 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning process (S161) in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

  The winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 76), and determines whether or not there is a prize at the first entrance 64 (start prize) or a pass through the through gate 67. Then, when a winning or passing is made, various random number values are collectively acquired from each random number generating IC (the random number generating IC for special figure 900 and the random number generating IC for general figure 901), and the first random number is obtained by using the various random number values. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to winning at the ball opening 64 (starting winning) and passing through the through gate 67. By the winning process (S161), in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), when the starting winning of the game ball and the passing of the through gate 67 are detected, the starting winning and the passing of the through gate 67 are determined. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where each register value (random number value) is obtained from each random number generation IC based on the respective values.

  When the winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 or has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed the through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first random number register R1, the first type register R2, and the stop type selection register R3. Then, each value of the second random number register R4 is obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance (S4503). If the ball has not won the first entrance (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4509 without executing the processes of S4504 to S4508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4505).

  If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S4503: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S4507), and in the process of S4501, the first random number register R1 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, The respective values of the per-type register R2 and the stop type register R3 are stored in the first area of the free symbol holding area 203a (the first area to the fourth area) (S4508). Move on to processing. In the process of S4508, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S4509, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through gate 67 (S4509). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4511).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4511). : No), and proceeds to the process of S4514. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is turned off. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S4512). Then, in the process of S4502, the value of the second random number register R4 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is stored in the empty symbol storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the first area to the fourth area). Is stored in the first area (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when the condition for obtaining the random number value is satisfied, the random number value (register value) is obtained and the random number value is obtained in the same one process (winning process). And configured to execute storing. Accordingly, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. Further, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( (Register value) can be used to store the corresponding random numbers, thereby reducing the processing load.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when selecting a notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b, “reselect” is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the mode of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 222a, “reselection” can be determined. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which "re-selection" is determined differs depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, the effect of different modes is executed in accordance with the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined. With this, it is possible to predict whether it is a jackpot or a miss according to the effect mode at the time of the super reach, so that the player can be noticed more by the effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 78A, in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, a pseudo variation complementing effect selection table 222d is provided. The pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines a pseudo fluctuation display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is. Also, the announcement effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), a variable reselection flag 223m and a variable reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment. 223e and the notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

  The variable reselection flag 223m is a flag indicating whether “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3. If the variable reselection flag 223m is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 (the type (form) of super reach has not been determined), and if it is off, This means that “reselection” has not been determined (the type (aspect) of super reach has been determined). The initial value of the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to off, and “reselection” is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3 in the fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach. When it is set to ON (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, in the variable reselection process (see FIG. 84), if any of the super reach types (super reach types A to C) is determined, it is set to off (see S5110 in FIG. 84). By referring to the variable reselection flag 223m, when "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3, the super reach type is reselected (reselected) in the variable reselection processing (see FIG. 84). Lottery) can be executed.

  The variation reselection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times the process of reselecting the type of the variation effect (re-lotting) is continued. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times "reselection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 during the period from when the variation pattern command is received to when the type of the variation pattern is determined. As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that a variation pattern in a different mode is set according to the number of times “reselection” is determined. The number of times "reselection" is determined is determined by the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The fluctuation reselection counter 223n is incremented by one each time the fluctuation reselection processing is executed (see S5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when any variation pattern mode is selected in the variation reselection process, the value is initialized to 0 (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

  Next, a variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 79A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79A, the variation pattern selection table 222a according to the present embodiment displays the variation pattern display mode when the variation pattern command notified from the main control device 110 is a command indicating complete departure. The normal variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selection, the normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern when the normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command. In this case, the super reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern when the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 (b) to (d), details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79B, the super reach selection table 222a3 is referred to when a hit super reach is notified, and is referred to when a missed super reach is notified. And a super-reach selection table 222a3b. In each table, the variation pattern types (super reach types A to C) are defined in association with the values of the effect random numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, the super reach type A is associated with the effect random number value in the range of “0 to 60”, and in the range of “61 to 120”. Are associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “121 to 180”. Further, “reselection” is associated with the remaining range of “181 to 255”. If one of the super reach types is assigned to the entire range of the production random number value “0 to 255”, the ratio of each super reach type is set to, for example, 3 due to the restriction on the number of the production random value. It cannot be equally distributed (1: 1: 1) for each type. That is, the ratio of each super reach type cannot be set freely.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each of the super reach types A to C is set by setting 60 random number values for determining the super reach types A to C and distributing the remaining random value to “reselection”. Can be made equal (the selection ratio of the super reach types A to C is 1: 1: 1).

  The selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1: 1: 1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined radix and allocating a multiple of the effect random number to each super reach type. For example, it is assumed that 30 is set as a predetermined radix, and that a super reach type A: a super reach type B: a super reach type C = 1: 2: 4 is set as a selection ratio. In this case, 30 (30 × 1) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type A, and 60 (30 × 2) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type B. 120 (30 × 4) effect random numbers may be assigned to the reach type C. Also, the remaining 46 (256-30-60-120) effect random numbers for effect may be assigned to “reselection”. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the selected selection ratio (ie, 1: 2: 4) without generating a fraction.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), in the super-reach selection table for departure 222a3b, the super-reach type A is associated with the effect random number value in the range of “0 to 80” and the range of “81 to 160”. Is associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “161 to 240”. Further, “reselection” is associated with the remaining range of “241 to 255”. That is, 80 random number values for effect are assigned to each super reach type. Thus, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly set to 1: 1: 1 as in the case of the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a.

  Note that the out-of-reach super reach selection table 222a3b is configured so that the probability of "reselection" being determined is lower (at the time of a big hit: 76/256, at the time of a departure: 16/256). Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot as “reselection” is determined continuously. Therefore, if "reselection" is easily selected despite the departure, the situation is likely to be eventually notified of the departure despite the execution of a highly anticipated effect, and the player is dissatisfied. There is a risk of being hugged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of “reselection” being determined in the case of a miss is reduced compared to the case of a jackpot, and the player is given an excessive sense of expectation in the case of a miss. Is prevented (suppressed). Thereby, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), details of the above-described pseudo-variation complementing effect selection table 222d will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d includes at least a jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 and an off-line complementary effect selection table 222d2. The pseudo fluctuation supplement effect selection table 222d is a data table for determining a display mode of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the super reach.

  In the present embodiment, when “re-selection” is determined when selecting a 60-second fluctuating effect mode corresponding to super reach, a fake fluctuating effect for 15 seconds (after the symbol is fluctuated and displayed, “3” is selected) , "4", and "1" are set (a display effect that is stopped and displayed in a combination of so-called main symbols). The pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a display mode after the pseudo fluctuation display for 15 seconds is completed.

  The jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 is data that defines the number of pseudo variable displays displayed during a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the hit super reach in association with the number of determinations of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is within the range of “0 to 3” before the mode of the hit super reach is determined from the super hit reach reach selection table 222a3a. If, the complementary effect A is set as the display mode during super reach. In this supplementary effect A, the fluctuating display (pseudo stop) is not performed once in the range of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuating, and the fluctuating display in which the symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed is executed. It is an aspect. In other words, the variable display is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance is stopped and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed are performed twice in total. You.

  In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is in the range of “4 to 6”, a complementary effect B in which a pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. When the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be in the range of “7 to 9”, the complementary effect C in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. In the range in which the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be “10 or more”, a complementary effect D in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed three times within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. You.

  As described above, the winning super reach has a higher probability of being “reselected” when determining the type of the super reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times of pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) increases as "reselection" is continuously determined. Therefore, as the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) increases, the degree of expectation of the player for the jackpot can be increased, so that the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) can be focused on. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a monotonous game.

  The supplementary effect selection table for out-of-office 222d2 is a data in which the number of pseudo fluctuation display displayed during the period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the out-of-reach super-reach change is defined in association with the number of times of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the number of times that “reselection” is continuously determined is in the range of “0 to 3” before the mode of the out-of-reach super reach is determined from the out-of-reach super reach selection table 222a3b. If it is, the pseudo effect of displaying the fluctuation (pseudo stop) is not performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is finally stopped and displayed is executed. A is selected. In other words, the variable display is executed for the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance is stopped is displayed, and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the departure is stopped is displayed twice in total. You.

  In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is in the range of “4 to 6”, a complementary effect B in which a pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. In the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is “7 or more”, a complementary effect C in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. You. That is, in the out-of-range super reach, the total of the pseudo fluctuation display executed during 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation and the pseudo fluctuation display executed during the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds (the number of times the chance eyes are displayed) ) Is configured to be a maximum of three times (one less than the upper limit of the number of hits per super reach). Therefore, in one superreach, when a chance is displayed four times, it is determined that a big hit will occur, so that the player pays attention to the number of pseudo variable display (the number of times of display of the chance). be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 81, the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In S1201 to S1210, S1212, and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, S1201 to S1210, S1212, and S1201 in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those of S1214 to S1218 are executed. Further, in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S1210 is completed, next, if “reselection” is determined in the previous selection processing of the super reach mode, the production disturbance A variable re-selection process for newly acquiring a numerical value and selecting a super reach mode is executed again (S1291), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 6 (see FIG. 84) in the present embodiment, after performing the command determination process (S1212), the variable display setting process 6 is performed (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214 and thereafter. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the above-described variable display setting process 6 (S1213). The variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting a display variation pattern command based on the obtained variation pattern command.

  Of the variable display setting processing 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410, S1401 to S1405 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing of each of S1407 to S1410 is executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1403 ends, the detailed mode of the variation pattern is then determined based on the variation pattern (variation time) extracted in the process of S1403. (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1404 and thereafter. Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the above-described variation pattern selection process (S1431). By this variation pattern selection process (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command from main controller 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as an effect random number value (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S1403 of the fluctuation display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 82) is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (S5002).

  In the process of S5002, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation pattern notified by the current variation pattern command is not super-reach (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted variation type is set in the variation pattern table 222a. It selects from each table, determines (selects) the display mode of the variation pattern based on the selected table and the effect random number value acquired in the process of S5001, and ends this process (S5004).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (S5002: Yes), the random number for effect acquired by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, The mode of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the random number is determined (selected) (S5003). As described above, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a hit super reach, the super hit reach reach selection table 222a3a and the random number value for effect are compared. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a departure super reach, the departure super reach selection table 222a3b is compared with the effect random number value.

  When the processing of S5003 is completed, it is determined whether or not “re-selection” is determined (selected) from the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a or the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b (S5005). Is determined (S5005: Yes), a pseudo fluctuation pattern (a pseudo fluctuation display for 15 seconds stopped and displayed at the chance) executed during 15 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is selected (S5006), and the fluctuation is performed. The reselection flag 223m is set to ON (S5007), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the one determined (selected) from the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a or the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b is not “reselection” (S5005: No) Then, a mode in which the pseudo fluctuation display is not executed and the fluctuation display for 60 seconds is executed (long super-reach mode) is selected (determined) as the display mode of the current fluctuation pattern (S5008), and the present process ends. .

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern to be selected is made different depending on whether or not “reselection” is determined at the time of selecting the mode of the first variation pattern. (15 second pseudo fluctuation pattern or 60 second long super reach). By setting a short pseudo fluctuation pattern for 15 seconds when "reselection" is selected, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the mode of the fluctuation pattern during the 15 seconds. When “reselection” is selected, the variation reselection process (S1291) that is repeated until the mode of the variation pattern is selected is executed every millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81). Therefore, even if re-selection is repeated up to 15000 times in 15 seconds, a variation pattern can be selected. The probability of determining “reselection” is 76/256 in the case of the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a, and 16/256 in the case of the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b. For this reason, the probability of "reselection" being determined 5,000 times in succession is about 1 / 2.5 × 10 7911 even in the case of a jackpot with a high probability, which is low enough to be statistically negligible. . Therefore, by setting the mode of the pseudo variation pattern for 5 seconds when “reselection” is determined, it is possible to secure time for executing the process of reselecting the aspect of the variation pattern. In addition, the pseudo fluctuation effect for 15 seconds is set in the same mode (the mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed) as the pseudo fluctuation effect that may be executed 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the effect in which the chance eyes are continuously displayed.

  Next, the details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, in the variable reselection process (S1291), when “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the previous super reach mode, a random number value for effect is newly acquired and the super reach This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In this variation reselection process (S1291), first, it is determined whether or not the variation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101). If it is determined to be off (S5101), the mode of the variation pattern is reselected. Since this means that there is no need to perform this processing, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is ON (S5101), the fluctuation pattern is selected in the previous fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) or the fluctuation reselection processing (see FIG. 84). Is selected (selected) when selecting the mode, the mode of the variation pattern is undecided. First, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is newly set as the effect random number value. (S5102), and then adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (S5103), thereby updating the number of times "reselection" is continuously determined (selected).

  When the processing of S5103 is completed, the random number for effect newly acquired by the process of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79 (b) to (d)), and the randomization for effect is performed. A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination (selection) by the processing of S5104 is “reselection” (S5105). If the result is “reselection” (S5105: Yes), the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the determined (selected) is not “reselection” (that is, any of the super reach types A to C is determined (selected)) (S5105: No) Comparing the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n with the pseudo fluctuation complementing effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c)) to execute the pseudo 15 An effect (pseudo-fluctuation complementing effect) in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0 to 3 times by the dynamic fluctuation display is selected (S5106).

  When the process of S5106 is completed, next, a 20-second super-reach mode (short super-reach mode) corresponding to the selected type of the pseudo-variation complementing effect is selected (S5107). In this short super reach, in the case of a departure super reach, a combination of stop symbols indicating a departure is finally stopped and displayed, and in a case of a hit super reach, a stop symbol indicating a large hit is finally stopped and displayed. This short super reach mode is started from a state in which the symbol is changing. At the same time, in each of the pseudo fluctuation supplementary effects (complementary effects A to D), a state in which the symbol is changing at the end of the execution period (40 seconds after the start of the change) is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the switching from the pseudo-variation complementing effect to the short super-reach mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable in the display mode at the time of the super reach, and to play the game with confidence.

  After the processing of S5107, a display fluctuation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the pseudo fluctuation complementing effect mode selected in the processing of S5106 and the short super reach mode selected in the processing of S5107 is issued. The variable reselection counter 223n is initialized to 0 (S5109), the variable reselection flag 223m is set to off (S5110), and the process ends.

  By the change reselection process (S1291), different change patterns can be displayed according to the number of times of “reselection”, so that various effect forms can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the variation of the variation pattern is selected by the sound lamp control device 113, It is configured such that “reselection” is determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which "re-selection" is determined differs depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, the effect of different modes is executed in accordance with the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined. With this, it is possible to predict whether it is a jackpot or a miss according to the effect mode at the time of the super reach, so that the player can be noticed more by the effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the mode of the fluctuation pattern during the 15 seconds. Further, since the effect of the 15 seconds is set to the same system as the pseudo-variation complementing effect set after the lapse of the period, the 15-second effect and the subsequent pseudo-variation complementing effect are related to each other. Can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the contents of the effect, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the “reselection” is determined, one pseudo fluctuation display is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but the pseudo fluctuation display is performed. It is not limited to one time, and may be executed two or more times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation effect (the number of times of displaying a chance) is set to a maximum of four times, but the number of times of display can be set to an arbitrary number.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value found in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  It is to be noted that each of the above-described embodiments and each of the control examples or a part thereof may be combined. Furthermore, although the control device is constituted by a plurality of control devices, the control device may be constituted by one integrated control device or some integrated control devices.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group>
A generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range, an obtaining means for obtaining the determination value generated by the generating means, and a setting in which the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is predetermined. A gaming machine having: a discriminating unit for discriminating whether the value matches the set value; and a control unit for executing a process set in accordance with the set value when the discriminating unit determines that the value matches the set value. When it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the obtaining unit obtains the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The number set to the specific determination value having the acquisition control means that controls the means, for the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, Said Gaming machine A1, wherein the ratio of the number set in the value is one that is set to be an integer.

  Here, for example, there are known gaming machines that perform various kinds of lotteries such as a lottery of winning or not based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port, a lottery of a mode of a display effect, and the like. In such a lottery, it is determined whether a value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined setting value, and when the determination value matches the setting value, the corresponding value is used. (For example, determination of the effect mode) is executed (for example, JP-A-2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of predetermined setting values to the number of possible determination values (that is, the probability of various lottery results) is a fraction or decimal number. ) Usually occurred. That is, the probabilities (percentages) of various lottery results could not be converted into integers. However, in the development stage of a gaming machine, it is general to design the ratio of each lottery result as a percentage (percentage). For this reason, when the designer allocates the number of set values that will be various lottery results in the development stage of the gaming machine, the probability of each lottery result designed as a percentage (percentage) and the judgment value of each determination value according to the percentage are determined. There is a possibility that it may be difficult for the designer to intuitively understand the correspondence relationship with the number. That is, the design may become inefficient.

  Also, when announcing the probability (ratio) of each lottery result, it is common to announce the numerical value converted to a percentage, but if the percentage has a fraction (decimal point), Depending on how to round down the decimal point, the sum of the percentages may not be 100%, and the notation may be difficult to understand for the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the generating unit obtains a newly generated determination value. The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means. Here, the number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  Thus, the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is easy to understand intuitively, and thus there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player. That is, there is an effect that the set value can be set appropriately.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein in the gaming machine A1, the generation means updates the determination value in a shorter time than a shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generation unit in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit obtains the determination value. It is possible to prevent the same determination value from being obtained a plurality of times by the obtaining unit before the execution. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the result of the determination by the determination unit from being biased.

  In the control processing executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, a plurality of different control processings are set, and each of the control processings executable by the control means has one or more set values. A gaming machine A3, wherein the assigned control means executes the control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.

  Thus, different control processes can be executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means, so that there is an effect that various control processes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine A3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is determined by the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine A4 wherein the ratio is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is set to the number of determination values in a predetermined range and a specific determination value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference from the set number is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  Number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined by the determination unit to match the predetermined set value in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4 A game machine A5 comprising: a number counting means for counting the number of times; and a determination ending means for terminating the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the number counting means has reached a specific number.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. The determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination termination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the means has reached the specific number.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the specific determination value is continuously determined and the other control processing cannot be executed during that time.

  A game machine A6 comprising: an execution control means for causing the control means to execute a specific control when the judgment by the judgment means is ended by the judgment end means in the game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, when the determination by the determination unit is completed by the determination ending unit, the execution control unit causes the control unit to execute specific control. There is an effect that control can be performed normally even when the determination is completed without the determined value being equal to the determined set value.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific determination value is a difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, A gaming machine A7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. Since the ratio of the number set in the set value to the number difference is set to be an integer in percentage notation, the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  A display unit for displaying a display effect on any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, and an effect executing unit for executing the display effect on the display unit; and the control unit controls the display effect performed by the effect executing unit. A gaming machine A8 wherein a type set in accordance with the set value is selected as the type.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, the display effect is executed by the effect executing means on the display means for displaying the display effect. As the type of the display effect executed by the effect executing means, the type set by the control means in accordance with the set value is selected.

  Thus, there is an effect that the ratio at which the display effect is selected can be set to a value that is easy for the player to understand.

  A plurality of control means for repeatedly executing a plurality of control processes including a determination by the determination means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8 in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, wherein the acquisition control means has the determination value acquired by the acquisition means Is determined to be the specific determination value different from the set value, after performing another control process based on the predetermined control procedure, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit The gaming machine A9, characterized in that the gaming machine A9 controls the acquisition means so as to acquire the information.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, a plurality of control processes including a determination by the determination unit are repeatedly executed by the multiple control units according to a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process based on a predetermined control procedure is performed, and then a new generation process is performed by the generation unit. The acquisition control unit controls the acquisition unit to acquire the determined determination value.

  Thereby, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress acquiring a new determination value without performing another control process, and thus delay other control processes. There is an effect that the program can be executed normally without any processing.

<Characteristic B group> (sub-side starts pseudo fluctuation based on the lapse of fixed intervals)
A main control unit for executing game control; and a peripheral control unit for executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control unit, wherein the main control unit sets a determination value in a predetermined range. Generating means for updating and generating, obtaining means for obtaining the determination value based on satisfaction of an obtaining condition from the generating means, and storage means for storing determination value information based on the determination value obtained from the obtaining means And when the determination value information is stored in the storage means, the number information signal generation means for generating a number information signal indicating the number of the stored determination value information, and the determination value information acquired from the acquisition means Display means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying on a display means identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period thereof. Advantageous benefits for the player when the period information signal generating means for generating the period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the determining means and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means The peripheral control means in the gaming machine having the privilege display means, the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, After a predetermined period of time elapses after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the display means displays the dynamics of the effect symbol on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. A game machine B1 comprising: an effect symbol dynamic display means for starting a target display.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a variable effect is started based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port. If the prize is not suspended, the variable production starts immediately after the prize is won (for example, within one second), and if the prize is suspended, immediately after the completion of the variable production based on the prize immediately before the suspension ( Usually, the processing is started within one second (for example, JP-A-2009-050734). In such a gaming machine, the instruction to start the variable effect is delayed, and if the variable effect is not started promptly, an impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally is given to the player, There was a risk of giving distrust.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display period and the identification information indicated by the received period information signal are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the identification information has been completed, the effect is displayed on the display means by the effect design dynamic display means on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. Dynamic display of symbols is started.

  Thus, when the predetermined period has elapsed without receiving the period information signal, it is possible to recognize that the operation is normal by dynamic display of the effect symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means corresponds to the set value when the determination means determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means matches a predetermined set value. The main control means determines the dynamic display period. When the main control means determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control means newly determines the dynamic display period by the generation means. The acquisition control means for controlling the acquisition means so as to acquire the determination value generated in the above, the number set to the specific determination value, the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination A gaming machine B2, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value to the difference from the number set in the value is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, when it is determined by the determining unit that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit matches the predetermined set value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. Here, when the main control unit determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control unit obtains the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The means are controlled by the acquisition control means. The number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  As a result, the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be made an integer, so that when the ratio of the dynamic display period is designed in the development stage of a gaming machine, the design can be efficiently performed. There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit can determine the dynamic display period. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means. One or more set values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit.

  Thus, a different dynamic display period can be determined according to the setting value determined by the determination unit, so that the determined dynamic display period can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the ratio of the difference to the number set in the above is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, the number of set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is equal to the number of determination values in a predetermined range. Since the ratio to the difference between the number and the number set to the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to an integer. Therefore, when designing the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the gaming machine, there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbols was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means. A game machine B5 comprising: a notification mode setting unit that sets a specific notification mode when the setting is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the period information is displayed even after a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbol was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means in the peripheral control means. When a signal is not received, a specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means, so that the player or the hall clerk recognizes that the period information signal has not been received for a specific period by the specific notification mode. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine B5, the specific period is a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal, so that the state in which the period information signal cannot be received may be a plurality of times. Can be prevented from continuing over the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that a defect of the period information signal can be reported earlier.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific determination value is determined by the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. The gaming machine B7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. When the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation, the ratio of the number set in the set value is an integer, so when designing the ratio of the dynamic display period in the development stage of the gaming machine This has the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the main control unit determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value by the determination unit, Until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control unit and determination of the new determination value by the determination unit are repeated. A gaming machine B8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is determined by the determining unit to be a specific determination value different from the set value, Until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, the acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control unit and the determination of the new determination value by the determination unit are repeated by the main control unit. The dynamic display time can be reliably determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the dynamic display is not executed in the peripheral control unit.

<Characteristic C group>
Generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value composed of values within a predetermined range, obtaining means for obtaining the determination value based on satisfaction of a first condition by the generating means, and obtaining means for the determination value Storage means for storing the determination value obtained in step (a), determination means for determining the determination value obtained by the obtaining means, and the determination value obtained by the obtaining means by the determination means being a specific determination value When it is determined, based on the establishment of the second condition and the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the newly generated determination value without storing the specific determination value in the storage unit, A control process determining unit that determines a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage unit, wherein the number of the specific determination values is such that the execution ratio of the control process is an integer ratio. Is set to Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the at it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined upper limit number of the determination values. If the determination value exceeds the upper limit number, the storage means overwrites one of the stored determination values. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being executed.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein the first condition in the gaming machine C1 or C2 is configured to be more easily satisfied than the second condition.

  In one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a predetermined number of the determination values are determined in advance by the determination value defining means, and the determination values defined by the determination value defining means are stored in the storage means based on power-on. A gaming machine C4 comprising: storage control means for performing control so as to store the predetermined number of determination values other than the specific determination value.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the control processing determining means determines one control processing from a plurality of control processings, and one or more control processings are determined for each of the plurality of control processings. The number of the determination values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes, wherein the number of the determination values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes is the number of the determination values within the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the ratio with respect to the difference from the number is set to be an integer.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value.

<Characteristic D group> (Pulse replay after replay)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a ball entry information acquiring means for acquiring ball entry information based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and before the ball is acquired by the ball entry information acquiring means. Based on the filled ball information, a discriminating means for performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a case where the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means A bonus granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player; a generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range in the gaming machine having the same; and the determination generated by the generating means. Acquiring means for acquiring a value, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Said judgment When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit and the dynamic display mode determining unit that is determined based on the determination result, the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific value. When the determination value is a determination value, when the dynamic display mode of the acquisition control unit and the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit is determined, the specific determination value is obtained by the acquisition. Means for temporarily stopping and displaying the identification information at least once during execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the newly obtained determination value. And a gaming machine D1.

  In the gaming machine D1, the temporary stop display means determines the number of times of the temporary stop based on the number of times the specific determination value is obtained when the one dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine D2.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein the specific determination value in the gaming machine D1 or D2 is set to a large value when the determination unit determines that the specific determination result is the specific determination result.

  The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a specific dynamic display mode determined when the specific determination result is determined by the determining means. And at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes determined when the result is other than the specific determination result are set, and the determination values are respectively set for the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Is a game machine D4 which is assigned and set in advance.

  In the gaming machine D4, the number of the specific determination values is set so that a ratio at which the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is determined is an integer. Gaming machine D5.

<Feature E group> (Common random number acquisition)
When the first condition is satisfied with the first generation unit that updates and generates the first determination value with a value within the first range, the first determination value acquired from the first generation unit is the specific first determination value. A first determination means for determining whether the first determination value is obtained, a first control means for executing the first control when the first determination value determines that the first determination value is obtained, and a second range. When a second generation unit that updates and generates the second determination value with the value of the second condition and a second condition different from the first condition are satisfied, the second determination value acquired from the second generation unit is specified. A second determining means for determining whether the value is the second determination value, and performing a second control different from the first control when the second determining value determines that the value is the specific second determination value. Based on the second control means and one of the first and second conditions being satisfied. Te, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a obtaining means for obtaining a more and each of the first judgment value and the second judgment value and said first generating means and the second generating means E1.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a random lottery of a special symbol based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port and performs a random lottery of a normal symbol based on a passing of a gaming ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port is obtained, and the normal symbol is determined based on the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for a normal symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, JP 2012-010910 A). In this case, it is necessary to make the control process different between a case where the game ball has won the starting port and a case where the game ball has passed through the through gate, and there has been a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is generated by updating the first determination value with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination unit determines whether the first determination value obtained by the first generation unit is a specific first determination value, and the first determination unit determines the specific first determination value. When it is determined that the value is the first value, the first control means executes the first control. The second determination value is generated by updating the second determination value with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determination unit determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation unit is a specific second determination value. When it is determined by the second determination unit that the value is the specific second determination value, a second control different from the first control is executed by the second control unit. Based on either one of the first condition and the second condition being satisfied, a first determination value and a second determination value are obtained by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, by the obtaining unit.

  Thus, the operation of the acquisition unit can be shared between the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the control processing can be prevented from becoming complicated. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  The gaming machine E2, further comprising a storage unit that stores the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit in the gaming machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit are stored by the storage unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination by the means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since there is no need to make an immediate determination using each determination value obtained by the obtaining unit, there is an effect that the degree of freedom such as the processing order in the control processing can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a determination by the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed. Gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is performed, and thus the predetermined condition is obtained by the obtaining unit. It is possible to prevent the first determination value or the second determination value from being discarded before being used for the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of the determination based on the abnormal determination value.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is a control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a control that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine E4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, control for giving the first privilege that is more advantageous to the player is performed by the first control, and control for giving the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is performed by the second control. Done.

  This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which a game ball can pass. The first condition is based on a game ball passing through the passing means. The game machine E5, wherein the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the first condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the ball entering the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. Holds.

  This allows the player to recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  A first detection unit that detects the establishment of the first condition in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a second detection unit that detects the establishment of the second condition, and the first detection unit and the second detection unit. A predetermined condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result; and a predetermined control for executing control in accordance with the satisfied predetermined condition when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. And a control execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detection unit, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detection unit. Based on the detection results of the first detecting means and the second detecting means, the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determining means, and when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied. The control according to the predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control executing means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, according to the control content of the predetermined control execution unit.

  A counting means for counting the number of times that the first condition is satisfied by the first detecting means in the gaming machine E6, and a counting by the counting means based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied by the second detecting means. Initializing means for initializing a result, wherein the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the counting result by the counting means is a predetermined number or more. Gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. That is, the number of times that the first condition is satisfied by the first detecting means is counted by the counting means. Then, the counting result of the counting means is initialized by the initialization means based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied by the second detection means. When the counting result by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition has been continuously detected a predetermined number of times or more without satisfying the second condition in accordance with the control content of the predetermined control execution unit.

  A third generation unit that generates a third determination value based on the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit in any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, and a third generation unit that generates the third determination value. Storage control means for storing the generated third determination value in the storage means until the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage unit, a specific condition determining unit that determines whether a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition determining unit. A gaming machine E8 comprising: a specific control execution unit configured to execute control based on the specific condition satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, a third determination value is generated by the third generation unit based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit, and the third determination value generated by the third generation unit is: The data is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit until the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the established first condition or second condition executes the determination. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage unit, whether the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the specific condition determination unit, and the specific condition determination unit determines whether the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined, the control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control execution unit.

  Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied according to the content of the control executed by the specific control execution unit.

  In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition determination unit is newly generated by the third generation unit based on the third determination value stored in the storage unit, the first determination value, and the second determination value. The gaming machine E9, wherein when the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E8, the game data is newly generated by the third generating means based on the third determination value stored in the storage means, and the first determination value and the second determination value. If the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit. Therefore, the first generation unit and the second generation There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not each determination value is normally updated by the means.

  When the first condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, a predetermined determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit, and a determination result of the predetermined determination unit A game machine E10, comprising: a notifying unit that performs notification based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine E10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E9. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, a predetermined determination is made by the predetermined determination unit based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit. Then, notification is performed by the notification unit based on the determination result by the predetermined determination unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily know the determination result of the predetermined determination according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

  A display unit capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine E10; and a dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit based on the satisfaction of the second condition. The gaming machine E11, wherein the notifying unit displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determining unit during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display unit.

  According to the gaming machine E11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E10. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, based on the satisfaction of the second condition. Then, during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means is displayed by the notification means.

  Thereby, since the display mode during the execution of the dynamic display can be diversified, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature F group> (can be acquired twice in one interrupt process)
The first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with the value in the first range, the second generation means for updating and generating the second determination value with the value in the second range, and the control processing of the game are repeated. A gaming machine having executable control means and interrupt means capable of executing an interrupt processing by interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined opportunity, wherein the interrupt means satisfies a first condition. Based on the result, as one processing of the interrupt processing, a first acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, A first control unit that executes a first control when the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit is determined to be the specific first determination value; and a second condition different from the first condition. Is executed later than the first acquisition unit based on the fact that As one process of the interrupt process, a second obtaining unit that obtains the first determination value and the second determination value newly updated by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, and A second control unit configured to execute a second control different from the first control when the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining unit is determined to be the specific second determination value. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a random lottery of a special symbol based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port and performs a random lottery of a normal symbol based on a passing of a gaming ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port is obtained, and the normal symbol is determined based on the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for a normal symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, JP 2012-010910 A). In this case, it is necessary to make the control process different between a case where the game ball has won the starting port and a case where the game ball has passed through the through gate, and there has been a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, based on the first condition being satisfied by the interrupt means, the first generation means and the second generation means respectively perform the first determination value and the second generation means as one processing of the interruption processing. The second determination value is obtained by the first obtaining unit. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining means is the specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control means. In addition, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the first generation unit and the second generation unit respectively perform a new process as an interrupt process acquired after the first acquisition unit. The first determination value and the second determination value that have been updated are acquired by the second acquisition unit. When it is determined that the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining means is the specific second determination value, a second control different from the first control is executed by the second control means.

  Accordingly, the second obtaining unit obtains the newly updated first determination value and the second determination value. Therefore, an independent determination different from the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit. You can get the value. Therefore, there is an effect that fairness when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value can be secured. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second generation unit updates and generates the second determination value at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation unit at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Therefore, the second determination value acquired based on the establishment of the second condition is a newly updated and generated determination value after the first determination unit acquires the second determination value. Therefore, even in a case where the first determination value and the second determination value are respectively acquired by the first acquisition unit and the second acquisition unit in one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit is performed. The value is an independent determination value different from the second determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit. As a result, there is an effect that fairness can be ensured when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interrupt processes, the interruption by the first acquisition unit and the interruption by the second acquisition unit And F. acquisition in the one interruption process.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, the first acquisition unit acquires the first condition and the second condition by the interruption unit. Since the acquisition by the second acquisition means is performed in one interrupt process, it can be determined whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, and the one interrupt process can be performed. In the processing, the first determination value and the second determination value can be obtained based on the establishment of the first condition and the second condition, respectively, so that the first determination value and the second determination value can be efficiently obtained. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first control is a control for providing a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a control that is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege. (2) A gaming machine F4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, a first privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the first control. Further, the second control gives a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege.

  This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a passing means through which a game ball can pass. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, the first condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the passage means. Further, the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  This allows the player to recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A gaming machine Z2 wherein any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine Z3 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
223f reselection counter (counting means)
800 Direction random number generation IC (generation means)
S1501 Part of acquisition unit S1505 Part of determination unit S1602 Part of acquisition unit, acquisition control unit S1606 Part of determination unit

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine that performs a special lottery based on the winning of a game ball to a starting port and a normal symbol winning lottery based on a passing of a gaming ball through a through gate is used. is there. In such a gaming machine, a determination value for performing a special symbol winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is obtained, and a normal symbol winning lottery is performed based on the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. To obtain the judgment value for

JP 2012-010910 A

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a concern that the control process may be complicated.

SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute a suitable control process .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the first determination means updates and generates a first determination value with a value within a first range, and a second determination value with a value within a second range. Second generation means for updating and generating game processing, control means for repeatedly executing game control processing, and interrupt processing for interrupting the game control processing and executing interrupt processing based on a predetermined opportunity. And the interruption means, based on the first condition being satisfied, being executed by the first generation means and the second generation means as one processing of the interruption processing. A first obtaining unit that obtains the first determination value and the second determination value, and a case where the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit is determined to be the specific first determination value First control means for executing the first control, and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first determination value newly updated by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition unit based on the first determination unit. And a second obtaining unit that obtains the second determination value and the first control when the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining unit is determined to be the specific second determination value. And a second control means for executing a second control different from the second control.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the first condition being satisfied, the first determination is performed by the first generation unit and the second generation unit as one process of the interruption process based on the first condition being satisfied. The value and the second determination value are obtained by the first obtaining unit. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining means is the specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control means. In addition, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the first generation unit and the second generation unit respectively perform a new process as an interrupt process acquired after the first acquisition unit. The first determination value and the second determination value that have been updated are acquired by the second acquisition unit. When it is determined that the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining means is the specific second determination value, a second control different from the first control is executed by the second control means.

Thereby, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and a jackpot determination value in a special symbol, and (b) is a first diagram in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in a special symbol, and (c) shows typically the correspondence of the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probable change) fluctuation table; FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a notice effect table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot notice effect selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the announcement notice effect selection table for departures. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice re-selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main re-selection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the weight progress effect processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the effect counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows announcement effect selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the re-acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate passage processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a super reach selection table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot super-reach selection table in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram of the departure super-reach selection table in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a pseudo-variation complementing effect selection table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot complementing effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a missed complementary effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change re-selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) disposed on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is regenerated in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball passes through a through gate (also referred to as a second entrance) 67. In this case, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Accordingly, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the symbol has hit the ordinary symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. You.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and thereafter, an added value after the end of the big hit is given. More specifically, in the “big hit A”, as the added value after the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change) from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. And at the same time, shift to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, in the “big hit B”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a normal symbol time saving state from the end of the big hit to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries as an added value after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is raised, that is, a so-called probable change state of the special symbol (during a probable change of the special symbol). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. Is shown.

  In the present embodiment, if the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends (that is, after the “big hit A” ends), the special symbol change state continues until the next big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given after the special game state ends and the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and after the special symbol lottery ends ten times. May be set to the low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to ten times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be in the normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the “big hit B” ends, but the normal symbol time-saving period is set to 100 times. It is not limited, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 12.1 inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, is being executed, or after the variation is completed. As a stop symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Done. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of balls that pass through the through gate 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. Specifically, only “0” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 “0 to 9” are determined as the jackpot determination values in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol. Judgment values are specified. If the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A), a special symbol is displayed. Is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8B) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, “big hit A” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 63” and defined. Further, “big hit B” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “64 to 127” and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 20” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 8C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 212” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 8C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol hit is performed. It is determined whether or not there is.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 27). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255), and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 255 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 255). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if the value of the random number matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the first random number table. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 127), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is retained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the value corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 255. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 8A). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/256”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. FIG. 8A). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 256 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “10/256”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 63” is “big hit A”. When the value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 127, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 125 to 127) to stop at the same time, and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., a range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns of “completely out of reach” (for example, in the range of 0 to 115) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the special design holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as large as “0 to 115”, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely out of place”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 125 to 127 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 116 to 124, so that it is difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than front and rear out”. In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64, when the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 101, Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 102 to 124, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out of order reach” is set to 125 to 127.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 256, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table (see FIG. 9A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9B) and an off-state (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9C). And a deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9D).

  First, with reference to FIG. 9B, the fluctuation pattern table for big hits 202d1 will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 63” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “64 to 223” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “224 to 255”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, out of reach is set. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), “0 to 127” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for a long deviation (10 seconds), and “128 to 255”.

  For the out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 191”, and the out-of-reach super-reach in the range of “192 to 254”. (60 seconds), but various special reach types (90 seconds) are set for “255”.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected in the special symbol variation state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115” by a stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "116-127", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 255 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 255). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the right or left through gate 67, and Is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 20". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 256 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 16, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/16”.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 212”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values of the jackpot is 208 out of the total number of random numbers of 256, and thus the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the first entrance 64 is set to “1 second × 2 times”. It is released. As described above, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the ordinary symbol when the probability is low, and further, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 255), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 27).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, It has at least a flag 203e, a time reduction counter 203f, a jackpot flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is immediately performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is determined based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the lottery result of the special symbol in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to a success / failure, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the special symbol 1 or the RAM 233. The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. From the above, various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or positively varying gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data becomes available in four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area). Of the areas that are present, the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 20 and S405 in FIG. 22). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of spheres of fluctuation display which is managed by the special symbol reservation sphere counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual number of spheres of fluctuation display retained by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 24). ).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e is set to OFF when the initial value is set to OFF, and is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability change jackpot) (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) to determine whether or not the game state is the positive change state (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next big hit game is started. This is set (see S214 in FIG. 20).

  Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 21) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability change flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is on, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability change flag 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time reduction state. When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. At this time, the counter 203f is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B (16R jackpot) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is reduced during the ordinary symbol variation process (see S508, S514, and S519 in FIG. 23). In the special symbol variation process, one is subtracted each time the variation time elapses. (See S217 in FIG. 20). In the normal symbol variation process, even if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0, if the above-described probable variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be in the normal symbol time reduction state (S508 in FIG. 23). , S514, S519). Thereby, after the end of the big hit A, it is possible to keep the special symbol positively changing state and the normal symbol time saving state until the next big hit, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, the game can be performed with the goal of being the big hit A as one goal, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The big hit flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is being performed. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is on, it means that the jackpot is being hit, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not being hit. The jackpot flag 203g becomes a jackpot due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the jackpot (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1003 in FIG. 28). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20), the big hit flag 203g is referred to determine whether or not a big hit is being made (see S201 in FIG. 20).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-mentioned counters (first random number counter C1, first random number counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second random number counter C4). , A second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and an MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers and a return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Have.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 26). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) as the processing at the time of power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the effect random number generation IC 800, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a notice effect selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, based on the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting a mode of the announcement effect executed during the variable display. Here, the notice effect in the present embodiment specifically indicates the degree of expectation according to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Show the production to do. One of three types may be selected as the character. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an elderly character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

  In the case of a boy character, the ratio selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected is higher than other characters, while the ratio selected in the case of a big hit is lower than other characters. Therefore, compared to the case where another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the fluctuation display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation of the big hit is lower.

  On the other hand, in the case of a girl character, the ratio selected when the special symbol lottery is not selected is lower than that of other characters, while the ratio selected in the case of a big hit is lower than other characters. Get higher. For this reason, when the girl character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during the variable display, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit.

  In addition, the elderly character is configured to have a higher selection ratio than a girl character and a lower selection ratio than a boy character in the case of a departure. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the selection ratio is higher than the boy character and the selection ratio is lower than the girl character. As a result, the player can be expected to have a big hit as compared with the case where the boy character is displayed. As described above, by changing the type of the announcement effect (character to be displayed) depending on whether or not a jackpot is achieved, it is possible to predict the expectation degree of the jackpot from the announcement effect. That is, before the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the special symbol lottery can be predicted from the content of the notice effect, so that the player's game during the execution of the variable display is prevented from becoming monotonous. (Suppression). Note that the type of the announcement effect is not limited to the type of the character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, an announcement effect of changing the back image may be executed, or an announcement effect of changing the mode (for example, size, color, or the like) of the changing third symbol may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the announcement effect selection table 222b defines at least a jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 and a release announcement effect selection table 222b2. The jackpot announcement effect table 222b1 is a data table for selecting an announcement effect mode to be executed in the variable display executed when the special symbol lottery is executed, and the miss announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a special symbol. It is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice effect performed in the variable effect performed when the lottery is out.

  First, the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot announcement effect table 222 b 1, the mode of the announcement effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number. Although details will be described later, the effect random number is a random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, the effect random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numerical value (0 to 255) as the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the notice effect A is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “0 to 24”. The announcement effect A is an announcement effect of a mode in which a boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B). As described above, in the case of the change display for the big hit, the boy character is selected. Since the announcement effect A is selected in the change of the jackpot, the unexpected feeling that the jackpot has been achieved despite the announcement effect having a low degree of expectation can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The announcement effect B is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “25 to 99”. The preview effect B is a preview effect in which an elderly character is displayed. As described above, the ratio selected in the case of the variable display with respect to the jackpot is higher than the preview effect A. For this reason, when the notice effect B is displayed, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the big hit. The announcement effect C is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “100 to 249”. This announcement effect C is an announcement effect of a mode in which a girl character is displayed, and is an announcement effect of a type that is most frequently selected in the case of a big hit. For this reason, by displaying the notice effect C, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a big hit.

  On the other hand, "reselection" is associated with the range of the effect random number in the range of "250 to 255". The "reselection" means that the selection of the notice effect is re-executed. In other words, when the value of the effect random number is in the range of “250 to 255”, the effect random number is acquired again from the effect random number generation IC 800 without determining the type of the announcement effect (reproduction of the effect random number). get). Then, the re-acquired effect random number and the jackpot announcement effect effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This “reselection” is repeatedly executed until the value of the effect random number becomes a value (0 to 249) corresponding to any of the announcement effect types. That is, when the value of the effect random number acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is “250 to 255”, “reselection” is repeatedly performed.

  By associating the re-selection with the range of “250 to 255”, the announcement effect is determined only when the 250 random number values for effect of “0 to 249” are obtained. For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when any of the 25 values “0 to 24” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 10% (25/25). 250). In addition, the notice effect B is selected when any of the 75 values “25 to 99” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 30% (75%). / 250). In addition, the notice effect C is selected when any of the 150 values of “100 to 249” is selected from the 250 values of “0 to 249”, and the probability is 60% (150%). / 250).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, among the 8-bit (256 types) values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used for selection of the announcement effect. That is, the number of decimal numbers that are well-divided (that is, 250) can be used for determining the announcement effect. Therefore, the probability that each announcement effect is selected can be set to a value (10%, 30%, 60%) with a good division (percentage (percentage) of the probability can be converted into an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each announcement effect is selected. Further, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (c), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure will be described. The release announcement effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which, as with the hit announcement effect selection table 222b1, the mode of the announcement effect to be executed is defined for each value of the effect random number.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the notice effect A is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “0 to 149”, and the value of the effect random number is in the range of “150 to 224”. Notice effect B is associated with the notice effect C in the range of “225 to 249”. In addition, “re-select” is associated with the value of the effect random number in the range of “250 to 255”, as in the jackpot announcement effect effect selection table 222b1.

  For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when it becomes any of the 150 values of “0 to 149” out of the 250 values of “0 to 249”, and the probability of being selected is 60% ( 150/250). In addition, the notice effect B is selected when any one of the 75 values “150 to 224” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 30% (75%). / 250). Further, the notice effect C is selected when any of the 25 values “225 to 249” is selected from the 250 values “0 to 249”, and the probability is 10% (25%). / 250). Therefore, in the case of a miss, the notice effect A is most easily selected as the notice effect type, and the notice effect C is most difficult to be selected. By providing a difference in the selection probabilities, it is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not a big hit will occur based on the type of the announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, in addition to the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (for example, the variable effect image), another effect image in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. When displaying a preview effect image (for example, a preview effect image), it is configured to select from the preview effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the preview effect to be additionally displayed. By defining the notice effect selection table 222b separately from the change pattern selection table 222a, it is possible to easily select the notice effect to be additionally displayed for the change effect. If the variation effect mode including the notice effect type is defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table 222a increases. For example, when there are 32 types of fluctuation effects and three types of notice effects that can be additionally displayed for each of them, 96 (32 × 3) fluctuation effects are displayed in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. The type must be specified. On the other hand, if the variation pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are separately prepared as in the present embodiment, 35 (32 + 3) types of the change effect and the notice effect can be provided. Therefore, an increase in the capacity of the ROM 222 can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 types) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a value of 10 bits (1024 kinds) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, 1000 values are used for the selection of the announcement effect, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, the lottery is performed again. Is also good. Then, the number of random values (judgment values) may be associated with each effect using 10 as a minimum unit. With this configuration, the percentage can be converted to an integer, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy. Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 7 bits) may be employed. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the announcement effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a notice reselection flag 223e, and a notice reselection counter are stored. 223f, a power-off flag 223y, and at least another memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b after the storage. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1408 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The advance notice reselection flag 223e is a flag indicating whether “reselection” has been determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b. If the notice reselection flag 223e is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the notice effect selection table 222b (notice effect has not been determined), and if it is off, "reselection" has occurred. It means that it has not been decided (the notice effect has been decided). The initial value of the notice reselection flag 223e is set to off, and “reselect” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b in the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of the notice effect. Is set to on (see S1506 in FIG. 33). Further, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), if any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) are determined, or if “reselection” is determined ten or more times in succession, the setting is turned off. (See S1613 in FIG. 34). By referring to the notice reselection flag 223e, when "reselection" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, reselection (re-lottery) of the notice effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). Can be performed.

  The notice re-selection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times that the process of selecting again the notice effect type (re-lotting) is continued. Here, the process of re-lotting the notice effect is to acquire a new random number value (judgment value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the determination of “reselection” from the notice effect selection table 222b. This is a process of reselecting the type of the notice effect, and is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, when the process of re-lotting the type of the notice effect is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of re-lotting is terminated, and the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C) are performed. It is configured to execute a different specific notice effect (special notice effect). Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the re-lottery is continuously selected for a long time and the type of the notice effect is not determined. Therefore, any of the preview effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the preview effect.

  The initial value of the notice reselection counter 223f is set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the process of re-lotting the type of the notice effect is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) (see FIG. 34). S1607). In the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) is determined, or “reselection” is determined ten or more times in succession, and the specific notice effect ( When the jackpot confirmation announcement effect and the jackpot expectation large announcement effect) are set, they are initialized to 0 (see S1612 in FIG. 34).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before a power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and power-off processing is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 30). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process (FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1108 in FIG. 29: Yes), a certain time has elapsed since the power-off flag 223y was set on. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the elapse of (100 milliseconds), that is, a case where there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring the production time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The timer measures the elapsed time from the start of an effect such as a variable effect. Based on the elapsed time measured by the timer, various controls (setting of operations of various accessories, development of effects, etc.) are performed.

  Next, the details of the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The effect random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random value) used for a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the announcement effect to be displayed) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. Since the effect random number generation IC 800 can randomly generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) each time, the determination result can be made random. Therefore, the displayed announcement effect can be determined at random, so that it is difficult to predict the displayed announcement effect. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The effect random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generation unit for generating a random value (random number value) within a range of 8 bits (0 to 255), and stores the random number value generated by the random number generation unit. And at least a random number storage unit. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates a pulse signal at random time intervals. The random number generation unit measures the time interval of the pulse signal generated by the RPG and measures 8 bits (1 byte). And stores it in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit is a specification capable of generating a random number value of 200 megabytes per second (two random number values per 10 μs). That is, the random number value can be updated at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the process for determining the announcement effect is executed. More specifically, when the “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the sound lamp control device 113 produces an effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30). A new random number value is obtained from the random number generation IC 800 for use, and a re-lottery of the announcement effect is performed. The re-lottery of the announcement effect is continuously executed at intervals of 1 millisecond as long as "reselection" is continuously selected from the announcement effect selection table 222b. During this period, one random value is acquired every 1 millisecond. On the other hand, since the random number generation unit is capable of generating two random numbers per 10 μs, even if “reselection” is continuously selected, a new random number value is used each time a re-lottery of the announcement effect is performed. A lottery (re-selection). Therefore, the displayed announcement effect can be determined at random, so that it is difficult to predict the displayed announcement effect. Therefore, unexpected games can be provided.

  The random number storage unit is a FIFO (First In First Out) storage device that stores a random number value generated by the random number generation circuit with a predetermined number (for example, 16) as an upper limit. The voice lamp control device 113 can read out the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it for determining the type of the announcement effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO-type storage device, when the reading of the random number value is instructed by the audio ramp control unit 113, the stored timing is changed to the audio random number value which is the earliest in time. Output to the control device 113. Then, the read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. This allows the random number value generated at a different timing to be output from the random number storage unit each time the voice lamp control device 113 instructs to read the random number value. Can be.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of a control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and the access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c includes two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated to the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1701 in FIG. 35) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and outputs one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “「 ”is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "special symbol loss", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 14B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sky stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”. FIG. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 14, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back surface C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, and the rear images of FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process, and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 13A to FIG. 13B). ), And stores image data corresponding to an image between position a and position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 13A and 13B) on the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 15A so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B and 15C and FIGS. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear surface image. be able to.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an effect timing storage area. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the fluctuation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to display. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the performance specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 17 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. This is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 47B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 37B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 37 (b) (see S2009). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 47A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image with respect to. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 18) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 37 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the one-frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 37 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The effect timing storage area 233i displays a timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying a notice effect (notice effects A to C, a jackpot confirmation notice effect, a jackpot expectation large notice effect) for each variation pattern type, and a special notice effect. This is an area for storing the timing to be performed (the value of the pointer 233f). In the present embodiment, when a preview effect or a special advance effect is set, the setting is performed so that the advance effect or the special advance effect is displayed at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i.

  Here, a method of setting a notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a notice effect data table that defines the display content for each notice effect type for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the variable display data table and the like. Then, when the display announcement effect command for notifying the type of the announcement effect is notified from the sound lamp control device 113, the announcement effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time are stored in the display effect table. The variable display data table that is set for this is synthesized. When performing the synthesis, the display contents specified in the announcement effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the announcement effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S2801 in FIG. 43A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S3021 in FIG. 44), and the demo display data table other than the demo display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, and FIG. 41B ) Of S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (determined) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39A, S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41A, and FIG. 41B ) Of S2605 and S2705 of FIG. 42). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 256, 128, 128, 256 respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol changing process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the probability change flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S215), and the process shifts to S218. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S215, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 If this is the case (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of a fluctuating effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203e, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing the probability change of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is performing the certainty change of the special symbol (that is, the certainty change flag 203e is ON) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301. And a special symbol jackpot random number table for a high probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers of “0 to 9” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the first random number. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value “0” stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, “0”) to be a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the two types of special symbol big hits (big hit A , Jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 63", it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16R sure change big hit). B (16R time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 9A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is determined. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115”, complete departure is set. Reach). On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol low probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the low probability stop type selection table, and the stop type is determined. Set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 101”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “102 to 127”, out of reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 27). Is done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol based on the holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406), and this processing is ended to return to the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. While being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: S504). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). In the process of S508, if the value of the counter 203f during the time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203e is turned on, it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the time is in the state of saving the time of the ordinary symbol (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is the special symbol jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the first entrance 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is not required. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and thus is acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 212”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,213 to 255”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 8C).

  In the processing of S508, when it is determined that it is not the normal figure time reduction state (S508: No), the processing shifts to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 255”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 8C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512), and when it is determined that it is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S514). If the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S515). ). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not in the special jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the processing of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The fluctuation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S520 or S521 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display updating process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After finishing, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 19), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is activated. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the pay-out / start-up control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since the processing at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly performed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20) and the start winning process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (256 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect or the variable is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 23). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 25 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 26) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening port 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), the big hit flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1004). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot is displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1004, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1004: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1007). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls are opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1008, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1010 that it is not the ending start timing (S1010: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1012). In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1012: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the end timing is reached (S1012: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot A (S1013). 203e is set to ON (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, in the process of S1013, when it is determined that it is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B) (S1013: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process goes to S1016. Transition.

  In the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1016 executed after the processing of S1015 ends, the jackpot flag 203g is set to off, and then this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1217 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), it executes the power-off process in S1217. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1217 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1217. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1104. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1217 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. .

  In the process of S1102, if the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1217, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a checking method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the process of S1105, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1106). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1217 (see S1215 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a temporary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110). The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1108 reaches the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started, for example, after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processes from S1104 to S1106 are performed via S1108. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process skips S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1110, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1110), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1111), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1109 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1104 to S1108 via the process of S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1104. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1211. In the processing of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1202 to S1211 is mainly processing (display), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1212 and the variable display setting processing in S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1208 described later (S1203), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1204). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1207 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1209, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1210 is completed, the notice reselection process for acquiring a new random value (judgment value) and reselecting the notice effect is executed by the decision of “reselection” when the notice effect is determined. (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. The details of the notice reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1212). Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Upon completion of the process in S1213, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the information of the occurrence of the power-off is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the flag during the power-off process are set to ON (S1216), and the power is turned off. A disconnection process is performed (S1217). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1218), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1215: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1212). This command determination process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1301). If a variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1307). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball count command has been received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110, (The number of times N of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is held) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). In the process of S1308, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1308, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1308 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the detection of the start winning or the special At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1308 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1307 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1307: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1309). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1309: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main processing. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1309 (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1311). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Then (S1313), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1311 that the round number command has not been received (S1311: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1314). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S1315), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1314, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1316), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the process of S1407 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then, in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After the data is shifted, a notice effect selection process for selecting a notice effect mode to be displayed in addition to the change pattern (change display) is executed (S1406), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S1407. The details of the announcement effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1407, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1407). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1407: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1408), and then the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) In, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1409). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1409 (S1410), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command and controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the announcement effect selection process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the notice effect selection process (S1406). This announcement effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and an announcement effect to be displayed in addition to the variation display (variation pattern) This is a process for determining the mode of notifying and notifying the display control device 114.

  In the announcement effect setting process (S1406), first, an effect random number value (judgment value) to be used for determining an announcement effect is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The acquired effect random number value is temporarily stored in, for example, a buffer area (effect random number buffer) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S1502), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot (S1502: No), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure (see FIG. 11C). A preview effect is selected (determined) based on the effect random number value (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 11C, when the value of the effect random number (effect counter) is “0 to 149”, the “announcement effect A” is determined as the type of the announcement effect, If the value is “150 to 224”, “announcement effect B” is determined, and if the value is “225 to 249”, “announcement effect C” is determined. On the other hand, if the value is “250 to 255”, “reselect” is determined. As described above, when “reselection” is determined, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, and the type of the notice effect is re-selected. Decide (reselect).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, among the 8-bit (256 types) effect random number values that can be generated by the effect random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used for selecting the announcement effect. That is, the number of decimal numbers that are well-divided (that is, 250) can be used for determining the announcement effect. Therefore, the probability that each announcement effect is selected can be set to a value (10%, 30%, 60%) with a good separation (percentage of the probability is converted to an integer). This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability that each announcement effect is selected. Further, a developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the lottery result is a jackpot (S1502: Yes), the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect stored in the effect random number buffer. The announcement effect is selected (determined) based on the random number value for the effect (effect counter value) (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, when the random number value for effect (effect counter value) is “0 to 24”, the type of the advance effect is “advance effect A”. Is determined, and when the value is “25 to 99”, “notification effect B” is determined as the type of the notification effect, and when the value is “100 to 249”, the type of the notification effect is “ Notice effect C "is determined. On the other hand, if the value is “250 to 255”, “reselect” is determined.

  In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the result of the selection of the notice effect is “reselection” (S1505). Is set (S1507) to notify the display control device 114 of the type of the notification, and the process ends.

  The display announcement production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 sets the display of the notice effect indicated by the display notice effect command by receiving the display notice effect command. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When performing the synthesis, the display contents specified in the notice effect data table are displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the notice effect start timing specified in the effect timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, when it is determined that “reselection” is determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this processing ends. By setting the notice reselection flag 223e to ON, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) described later, it is possible to newly obtain an effect random number value and determine the type of the notice effect again.

  Next, the notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notice reselection process (S1211). This notice reselection process (S1211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice reselection process (S1211), first, it is determined whether the notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). As described above, the notice reselection flag 223e is a flag that is set to ON when “reselect” is determined when determining the type of the notice effect, and a new effect random number value is obtained by acquiring a new effect random number value. This is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to reselect the effect.

  In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the notice reselection flag 223e is turned off (S1601: No), there is no need to perform the reselection of the notice effect, and thus this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the advance notice reselection flag 223e is ON (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to reselect the advance notice effect (when determining the type of the previous notice effect, "Re-selection" is determined, and the type of the notice effect is not determined). Therefore, in this case, the effect random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S1602), and then, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (the variable display for setting the notice effect is for notifying the big hit) (S1603).

  In the process of S1603, if it is determined that the display is not a variable display for notifying a jackpot (S1603: No), a release announcement effect selection table 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and an effect random number value (effect counter value). Is selected (determined) based on the above (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1603, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S1603: Yes), the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect random number value (effect) (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the announcement effect is re-selection (S1606). If the preview effect selection result is not a re-selection (S1606: No), a preview effect command is set based on the preview effect selection result (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  When "reselection" is determined (S1606: Yes) at the time of determining (selecting) the type of the notice effect, 1 is added to the value of the notice reselection counter 223f (S1607), and then the reselection counter is set. Is determined to be 10 or more (S1608). In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1608, if the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more (S1608: Yes), the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, and the identification is different from the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C). (S1609 to S1611) for setting the announcement effect (big hit confirmation advance effect, big hit expectation large advance effect). By stopping the reselection when the number of consecutive reselections becomes 10 or more, "reselection" is continuously selected (determined) endlessly, preventing the type of the notice effect from being determined (suppressed). it can. Therefore, any of the preview effects can be reliably displayed at the display timing of the preview effect.

  Processing for canceling the re-selection of the advance notice production and setting a specific advance notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, large hit expectation degree large notice effect) different from the normal notice effects (notice effects A to C) (S1609-) In S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (whether the variable display for setting the announcement effect is a variable display for notifying the big hit) (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S1609: Yes), the specific jackpot is indicated as a specific announcement effect (jackpot confirmation announcement effect, jackpot expectation degree large announcement effect), and the jackpot determination is suggested. A display announcement effect command for notifying the announcement effect is set (S1610), and the flow shifts to the process of S1612. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1609 that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (is out of place) (S1609: No), it is determined as a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation large notice effect). A display announcement effect command for notifying an announcement effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high is set (S1611), and the process shifts to S1612.

  As described above, when the “reselection” is determined continuously for a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific notice effect not specified in the notice effect selection table 222b (a jackpot final notice effect, a large jackpot expectation degree). By setting the notice effect, it is possible to make the player think that an unusual notice effect is displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probability of “reselection” being determined ten times in a row is a very low probability of 6/256 to the tenth power (about 京 K). For this reason, a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation large notice effect) is displayed, so that the player can have more joy.

  In the processing of S1612 executed after the processing of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), the notice reselection flag 223e is turned off (S1613), and the present processing is performed. To end. By the notice reselection processing (see FIG. 34), the notice effect is reselected every millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 30), so that the type of the notice effect is determined without stopping other processing. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the opportunity to cancel the re-selection of the notice effect is set to a case where “re-selection” is performed ten times in a row, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of predetermined times at which “reselection” is selected may be set to be large (for example, 20) or may be set to be small (for example, 5). Alternatively, the predetermined time may elapse (for example, 3 seconds after the first “reselection” is selected).

  In the present embodiment, when the reselection of the notice effect is terminated, a specific notice effect (a jackpot confirmation notice effect, a jackpot expectation large notice effect) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is performed Of course, it may be set so as not to exist.

  In the present embodiment, the re-selection is performed in the selection of the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that re-selection is performed in selecting an effect mode of the effect displayed when the button is pressed (so-called button press effect).

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main process.

  Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1701), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1701) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1801). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1801.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1802, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1802, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1803). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1702 in FIG. 35) (S1805), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1701) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1802. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1801 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then transfers the leading part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1801. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1802, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1703, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1704). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1704, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1705). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B), a simple command is displayed such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. The determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1705, interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1706, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and a processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt processing, various processings corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 37B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2002) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2003) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2002), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of the fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2003), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2004). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2003) or the simple display setting process (S2009). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  Next, a drawing process is performed (S2006). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2004), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2005) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2007, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach, complete out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2001: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2008) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2009) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 43, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2002), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2003) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2102). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2103).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2104). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2105), and returns to the process of S2101.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2105) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2201).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2201, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation data longer than the set display data table is actually Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2203), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2204), and both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2205). Upon completion of the process in S2205, a pointer value (the value of the pointer 233f) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this processing ends.

  By storing the execution start timing of the notice effect and the special notice effect in the effect timing storage area 233i, the notice effect data table or the special notice effect data for the address after the stored timing (the value of the pointer 233f). The announcement effect can be easily set simply by adding the specified contents of the table.

  By executing the change pattern command process (see FIG. 39), in the display setting process, the change set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2204. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content is transferred by the process of S2202. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. Normal To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2203, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2104, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2106). If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the stop type command for display (S2301), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop symbol counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is set (S2302).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. The command is set to OFF (S2303), the stop type command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2302. In the above-described task processing (S2004), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2302 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2303, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the process of S2302.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S2106, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2106: No), then, it is determined whether there is a display announcement effect command among unprocessed commands (S2108). If there is a display announcement effect command for display (S2108: Yes), an announcement effect command process for setting an announcement effect is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, details of the notice effect command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the announcement effect command processing. This announcement effect command processing is a process for setting an announcement effect of the type notified by the display announcement effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice effect command processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to set the notice effect (S2401). Here, the timing at which the notice effect can be set specifically means a case where the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start time of the notice effect. That is, if it is temporally before the timing to start the notice effect in the current fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the notice effect can be set in the process of S2401. In order to secure the processing time for setting the notice effect, a predetermined time before the start of the notice effect is set as a reference time, and it may be determined whether the time is earlier than the reference time. . Thus, even if the processing time for setting the notice effect is long, the notice effect setting process is started by the above-described reference time, so that the notice effect setting process is completed by the time the notice effect starts. Can be done.

  In the process of S2401, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: Yes), the notice effect data table corresponding to the type of the notice effect notified by the display notice effect command for display is determined, Data is added to the display data table buffer 233d after the pointer position corresponding to the announcement effect timing (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the notice effect can be set (S2401: No), the re-selection is continuously determined in the notice effect selection process (S1406) of the sound lamp control device 113, for example. This is a case where the timing at which the display announcement effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the announcement effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which a special announcement effect for executing the announcement effect in a special display mode can be set (S2403).

  Here, the timing at which the special notice effect can be set specifically means a case where the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start time of the special notice effect. . That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the special notice effect in the current variation pattern, it is determined that the special notice effect can be set in the process of S2403.

  In the process of S2403, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the special notice effect can be set (S2403: Yes), the special effect data table corresponding to the display notice effect command is determined, and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position is set to the timing corresponding to the timing (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is an effect that executes the notice effect in a special display mode, and is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the notice effect based on the notified notice effect for display (for example, a boy in the center of the screen). Is an effect that is executed in a special display mode different from the effect (for example, an effect in which a boy is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the screen).

  Due to the processing of S2403 and S2404, even if the timing at which the display announcement effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the announcement effect, special effects different from the announcement effects (announcements A to C, specific announcement effects) are made. The special announcement effect can be displayed in a simple display mode. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display announcement effect command is delayed, the special announcement effect can be displayed based on the notified display announcement effect command while avoiding overlapping display with other effects. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the timing is not such that a special announcement effect can be set (S2403: No), the process directly proceeds to S2405. In the process of S2405, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2405), the process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this notice effect command processing, the notice effect is easily set by synthesizing the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. be able to. At the time of performing the synthesis, for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice effect specified in the effect timing storage area 233j, the display specified in the notice effect data table is performed. It is configured to add content. That is, in the preview effect data table, display contents after the start timing of the preview effect are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared to a case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

  Referring back to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S2108, if it is determined that there is no display announcement effect command for display (S2108: No), then it is determined whether there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2110: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the opening command processing (S2111) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2110, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2112). If there is a round number command for use (S2112: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2112, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S2114). If there is an ending command for use (S2114: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2115) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2114 that there is no ending command for display (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2116). If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, upon detecting that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2802. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S2004), if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S2802. From the RAM, the type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2116, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2118). If it is (S2118: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2119) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2118, when it is determined that there is no error command (S2118: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2120), and the process returns to S2101.

  In the processing of S2101 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2102 to S2120 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2101 to S2120 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2008) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39A) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 39B), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2201, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2003), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2004), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting processing is ended and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2004), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. Therefore, the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2009) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 13 (b) and (c) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2005), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination processing (see S2008 in FIG. 37 (b)) and a simple display setting processing (see S2009 in FIG. 37 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2003). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505). If the transfer has been completed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in step S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing of S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3509).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S3510), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Of the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the ON rear image determination flag is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3509, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the processing of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the above-described drawing process (S2006), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the rendering process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and parameters necessary for rendering each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2004). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 37B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when performing a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the announcement effect to be displayed), the determination is performed again at a predetermined ratio (6/256). (The notice effect is re-selected). The number of determination values corresponding to the reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a perfect number (250). That is, when the probability that each of the determination results (notification effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point).

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform various kinds of lotteries such as a lottery based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning port, a lottery in a mode of a display effect, and the like. In these lotteries, different lottery results are obtained depending on the random number values selected, so that randomness can be given to the lottery results.

  However, since random numbers used for various lotteries are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, the parameter of the lottery is generally a bit unit (power of 2) due to the specifications of the IC. For this reason, when the probability of each lottery result is converted into a percentage, a fraction (below the decimal point) is usually generated. That is, the percentage could not be converted to an integer. For this reason, it may be difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for each lottery result. In addition, even when designing a gaming machine, there is a case where an integer percentage is once set as a probability target, and a process of calculating the number of random numbers that is closest to the set target has been performed. There was a risk of becoming.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a random number for which re-selection is determined is allocated so that the parameter of the probability in the predetermined lottery is 250, which is a multiple of 50, so that a minimum of 2% (1 of the parameter) / 50) The probability of each lottery result can be sorted by the percentage in increments. That is, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be easily converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the lottery result is easily understood intuitively. Further, by converting the percentage of the probability of each lottery result into an integer, the probability of each lottery result can be efficiently designed at the time of design.

  In the present embodiment, an IC that generates any one of 8-bit (256 types) values is adopted as the effect random number generation IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a value of 10 bits (1024 kinds) may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values, which are multiples of 100, are used for selecting a notice effect, and if 24 values different from the 1000 values are obtained, a re-lottery is performed. It may be configured to do so. Then, for each effect, the number of random numbers (judgment values) may be associated with 10 (1/100 of the parameter) as the minimum unit. With this configuration, the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be set by an integer value in increments of 1%, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy to perform. . Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 5 bits) may be adopted. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for the selection of the announcement effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be converted to an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose probability is easy to understand and whose design is easy. It should be noted that the percentage is not limited to being converted to an integer, but may be of course a unit of 0.1%.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number (so-called hardware random number) generated by the random number generation IC is used as the effect random number value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which a value of a random number (a so-called software random number) generated by software processing is used.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the announcement effect is performed, the reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). However, the lottery that can determine the reselection is the lottery of the advance effect. It is not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that the re-selection is determined at a predetermined ratio also in the lottery when selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Further, the lottery for which re-selection can be determined is not limited to the lottery executed in the sound lamp control device 113. For example, when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, or when a jackpot type is selected, a reselection may be selected at a predetermined rate. With such a configuration, when the probability of a jackpot or the probability of each jackpot type is expressed as a percentage, it can be expressed by an integer value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose specifications are more easily understood.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery for determining the notice effect, if the “reselection” is determined ten times or more, the lottery for determining the notice effect is terminated, and the specific notice effect ( Although the special announcement effect is configured to be executed, the number of times that the lottery is determined to be terminated is not limited to ten, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, by making the number more than ten, it is possible to more reliably determine any of the types of the preview effects (the preview effects A to C). Further, for example, by making the number less than 10, the lottery in the mode of the preview effect can be terminated with a smaller number of determinations even when “re-selection” is determined continuously, so that the preview effect is determined. The time it takes to complete.

  In the present embodiment, the announcement effect previously notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) specified in the effect timing storage area 233i. It is not something that can be done. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 may execute a process for determining a notice effect when it is determined that the start time of the notice effect has come. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. With this configuration, the timing of notifying the type of the notice effect changes according to the number of times “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the notice effect, so that the timing of starting the notice effect can be changed. it can. That is, since not only the type of the notice effect but also the start timing can have a variation, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, in order to have a variation in the timing at which the notice effect is started, when “reselection” is determined, a process of selecting the notice effect again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. You may make it.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when the type of the notice effect is randomly selected in the audio lamp control device 113, the “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). The number of determination values corresponding to “reselection” is set such that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a definite number (for example, a multiple of 50). . That is, when the probability that each of the determination results (notification effects A to C) is determined in the predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), the percentage is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in a part of the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Make up. Thereby, in the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) in the main controller 110, when the probability that each determination result (each variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage), an integer percentage (zero after the decimal point) Becomes

  In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to “re-selection” is continuously obtained and the timing of notifying the variation pattern to the audio ramp control device 113 is delayed, a specific effect (weight elapsed effect) is performed by the audio ramp control device 113. Is configured to be executed. While the “reselection” continues, the lottery result is in an indeterminate state, and thus the fluctuation time is not determined. In other words, the display of the variation pattern cannot be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (weight elapsed effect), the gaming machine can operate normally even if the lottery result is indefinite for a long time (“reselection” continues many times). Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, a game can be performed with confidence.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in the configuration is that the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for general drawing are the input / output of the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the port 205, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is Some changes are made, some processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and an operation is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The point is that a part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a universal figure random number generation IC 901 are provided to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random number values) obtained based on the winning prize. Further, the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number value) obtained based on a ball passing through the through gate 67. That is, instead of the various counters (the first random number counter C1, the first random counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4) stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Thus, a counter value (random number value) used for various lotteries (determinations) executed in the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In the second embodiment, the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (first random number register R1, first random type register R2, stop type selection register R3, and fluctuation type register RS1). I have. These registers have the same role as the random number storage unit of the effect random number generation IC 800 in the first embodiment. That is, each register stores the random number value generated by the random number generation unit corresponding to each register, and outputs the random number value to the outside when the instruction to read the random number value is issued.

  The random number value (register value) updated in the first hit random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not a special symbol is a big hit. That is, the register value of the first random number register R1 corresponds to the first random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). Judgment value). The first random number register R1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. The stored value is updated, for example, twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz). The update frequency of the stored value of the other registers is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of the stored value is different.

  The register value updated in the first hit type register R2 is used to select the special symbol big hit type. That is, the value of the first hit type register R2 corresponds to the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (see FIG. 8B) specified in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). Judgment value). The first hit type register R2 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select the type of stop in the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with a random number value (judgment value) defined in a stop type selection table (not shown) to obtain a special symbol. Is determined (selected). This stop type selection register R3 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

  The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). That is, the value of the variation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (determination value) defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C). Value) and the type of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. This variation type selection register RS1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. The random number value (register value) obtained from each register (the first random number register R1, the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the variation type register RS1) of the special figure random number generation IC 900 is a special value. After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. That is, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j stores the first random number counter buffer, the first hit type counter buffer, the stop type selection counter buffer, and the variation type counter buffer among the counter buffers 203y in the first embodiment (FIG. 6). Reference).

  The general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is provided with one type of register (second random number register R4). The register value updated in the second random number register R4 is normally used to determine whether or not a symbol has been hit. In other words, the value stored in the second random number register R4 corresponds to the second random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and the random number specified in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (judgment value) to judge whether or not it is a normal symbol hit. The second random number register R4 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255.

  The random number value (register value) obtained from the second random number register R4 of the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is temporarily stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k, and then stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area. The data is transferred to an empty area 203b. That is, the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second random number counter buffer in the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the various determinations performed by the main controller 110 are determined by the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for ordinary figure provided outside the main controller 110. (Hardware random number). With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a random number generating IC (a random number generating IC for special figure 900 and a random number generating IC for general figure 901) whose random number value is updated (generated) twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update (generate) a random number value when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC may be used. Thus, the number of times the random number value is updated (generated) in the random number generation IC can be minimized, and power consumption can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a random number generation IC (a random number generation IC 900 for a special figure and a random number generation IC 901 for a general figure) capable of acquiring a random number value that is a random value every time it is updated (generated) is used. It is not limited to. For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates the value one by one at short time intervals (for example, 1 μs), the timing at which the value is obtained from the random number generation IC becomes irregular. Naturally, it may be acquired.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52A, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. Further, instead of the counter buffer 203y, a special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and a general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

  The main reselection counter 203h is a counter that indicates the number of times “reselection” has been continuously selected in a predetermined determination (determination of a variation pattern) performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 and the fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c)), Is configured to select “reselect” at the ratio (6/256). When this “reselection” is selected, a random number value (the value of the fluctuation type counter RS1) used for determining the fluctuation pattern, similarly to the case where “reselection” is selected at the time of selecting the notice effect in the first embodiment. Is newly obtained, and the variation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined again based on the new random number value. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be determined quickly because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without performing other processing to determine the variation pattern (variation time). I do. However, if the “reselection” continues too many times, the period during which other processes (eg, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes long, and for example, the start winning can be detected. Or the passage of the through gate 67 may not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), Is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then acquire the value of the variation type register RS1 again to execute a process of determining a variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  The initial value of the main reselection counter 203h is set to 0, and “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the value (see S333 in FIG. 56). “Reselection” is determined four times or more consecutively, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is temporarily interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the variation pattern table 202d, which is a data table in which “reselection” is associated with a part of the random number value (judgment value), will be described. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to select a variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, but its definition is changed from that of the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, “reselection” is associated with some determination values (random numbers) in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the present embodiment. In addition, the distribution of the determination value (random value) to another determination result is changed by allocating the determination value (random value) to “reselection”.

  Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 24” as the determination value, and the fluctuation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds) is within the range of “25 to 174”. The variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “175 to 249”. Then, “reselection” is associated with the remaining determination values of “250 to 255”. By setting the number of determination values (random number values) for determining “reselection” to be six from “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach ( 90 seconds) can be set to 250 (0 to 249). 1% is equivalent to 2.5 random number values (judgment values) (250/100), so if a random number value (judgment value) is assigned with 5 (2%) as the minimum unit, the probability percentage Can be an integer value.

  In this embodiment, 25 (5 × 5) determination values of “0 to 24” are assigned to various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “25 to 174” of various types of super reach (60 seconds). 150 (5 × 30) determination values are allocated, and 75 (5 × 15) determination values “175-249” are allocated to various special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability of selecting various types of normal reach is 10% (2% × 5), the probability of selecting various types of super reach (60 seconds) is 60% (2% × 30), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) Is 30% (2% × 15). That is, random numbers (judgment values) are assigned so that the percentage of the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected becomes an integer value. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the generation of a fraction (decimal point) in the percentage, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having more easily understandable specifications. Also, at the time of design, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probabilities of the respective determination results.

  Similarly, the random number value (judgment value) of the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53 (b)) and the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 53 (c)) are similar. “Reselection” is associated with the range of “250 to 255”. That is, the configuration is such that the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when the value becomes 250 (0 to 249) of the 256 random values (judgment values). In addition, the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern is set to be a multiple of 5, thereby making the percentage of the probability that each variation pattern (variation time) is selected be an integer. This makes it possible to set the probability to a value that is easier to understand, regardless of whether it is a jackpot or a miss.

  Returning to FIG. 52 (a), the description will be continued. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not “reselection” is continuously determined a predetermined number of times (four times) in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time). If the main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined four or more times in succession, and if it is off, it means that the number of times of "reselection" is less than four times. means. In the main reselection process (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59), and the main reselection flag 203i is referred to. If the selection flag 203i is on, a process for acquiring a new random value from the variation type register RS1 and determining a variation pattern (variation time) (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) is executed.

  The special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and the ordinary figure counter temporary storage area 203k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing the register values instead of the counter buffer 203y as described above (FIG. 51). reference). Each random number value (register value) acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j, and then transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a. Further, the random number value (register value) acquired from the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k and then transferred to an empty area of the normal symbol retaining sphere storing area 203b.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 in the first embodiment in that a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h are added.

  The weight measurement counter 223g ends the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation pattern) ends in a state where at least one fluctuation is suspended (the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more). This is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the start. The weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by 1 in the weight progress effect processing (see FIG. 63) from the reception of the stop command in a state where the number of reserved balls is 1 or more until the next fluctuation display is started. . Since the wait progress presentation process (see FIG. 63) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp control device 113, the weight measurement counter 223g sets 1 for every 1 millisecond. Is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to in the weight progress effect processing (see FIG. 63) (see S4205 in FIG. 63), and a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed since the previous fluctuation was completed. If the next change that is suspended is not started even after the lapse of time (a change pattern command is not output from main controller 110), a specific effect (weight elapse effect) is executed (FIG. 63). S4206).

  Here, the case where the fluctuation pattern command is not output from main controller 110 even after the lapse of the predetermined period means the case where it takes time for the main controller 110 to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). And so on. That is, in the process of determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d, “reselection” is determined continuously, a new random value (judgment value) is obtained from the variation type register RS1, and specified in the variation pattern table 202d. This is the case, for example, when the process of comparing with the determined determination value is repeated endlessly. If the variation pattern (variation time) is not determined, the variation pattern command cannot be set from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, so that the more the "reselection" is repeated, the more the previous variation ends. After that, the period until the next fluctuation is started becomes longer. In this case, if the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to wait until the variation pattern command is received, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Nevertheless, since the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without starting the next variation after the previous variation pattern (variation display) ends, a specific effect (weight (Progressive effect). As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, so that the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally even if the next fluctuation effect is not started. it can. In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  The weight measurement flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the previous change has been completed and the change pattern command has not been notified in a state where the number of reserved balls is one or more. That is, it indicates whether or not it is a period in which the time measurement (count) by the weight measurement counter 223g is executed. If the weight measurement flag 223h is on, it means that the previous fluctuation effect has been completed and the next fluctuation pattern command has not been notified, and during this time, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed. Every time this is done, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223h is off, the wait control counter 223g is not updated because it is not a period of waiting for the main controller 110 to notify the variation pattern command. The weight measurement flag 223h is set to ON when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 and a pending ball exists (S1335 in FIG. 62). In addition, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, it is set to off (see S1332 in FIG. 62). The weight measurement counter 223g can be accurately updated by the weight measurement flag 223h.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, similarly to the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19). This is a periodic process that is executed.

  Of the timer interrupt processing 2 in the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 are steps S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And S109 are executed.

  In the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol change process (see FIG. 20), the start winning process (see FIG. 22), and the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. ), A special symbol change process 2 (S104), a start winning process 2 (S105), and a through gate passage process 2 (S107) are respectively executed. Details of each of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 is completed, the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time) (special symbol variation start process 2) is performed a predetermined number of times (four times). When the reselection is determined, the main reselection process, which is a process for determining a variation pattern (variation time), is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. Details of the main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is a process of displaying a variation of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, similarly to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) of the second embodiment, S201 to S207 and S209 to S218 respectively include S201 to S207 and S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing from S218 to S218 is executed. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the variation is not in progress in the process of S202 (S202: No), a predetermined time has elapsed since the last stop display of the third symbol. It is determined whether (one second) has elapsed (S231), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in the process of S231 (S231: Yes), each process of S203 to S208 is executed. In the process of S208 in the present embodiment, a special symbol change start process 2 (S208) is executed instead of the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol change start process 2 (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol change start process 2 (S208) is similar to the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. ”Or“ missing special symbol ”(determination of success or failure) and determine the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. It is processing for.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S301 to S311 are the same as the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment (S301 to S311). The same processing is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the process of S307 or S309 is completed, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to (c)) is obtained in the process of S307 or S309. It is determined whether “reselection” is determined (selected) based on the value of the variation type register RS1 (S331). Then, when it is determined that “reselection” is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is newly acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S332), and the main reselection is performed. One is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334). If the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute the process again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S334, when it is determined that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is temporarily terminated, and the main reselection flag 203i is reset. It is set to ON (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S336), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that “reselection” has been determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. By the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern can be determined, and when "reselection" is determined, the reselection of the variation pattern can be repeated. Here, the variation pattern (variation time) must be determined quickly because the variation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the variation pattern (variation time) is completed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the variation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired without performing other processing to determine the variation pattern (variation time). I do. However, if the “reselection” continues too many times, the period during which other processes (eg, the start winning process, the through gate passing process, etc.) are not executed becomes long, and for example, the start winning can be detected. Or the passage of the through gate 67 may not be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times "reselection" is determined continuously is counted by the main reselection counter 203h, and when "reselection" continues more than a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), Is configured to once execute another process executed by the MPU 201, and then acquire the value of the variation type register RS1 again to execute a process of determining a variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute a process for determining a variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

  Next, the start winning process 2 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing start winning processing 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

  In the start winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes in S401 to S405 are the same as those in S401 to S405 in the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  In the start winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the first random number register R1 The values of the first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900, stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process proceeds to S402. .

  In the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 is completed, each value of the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (S432), this process ends. By the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 can be acquired and used for a special symbol lottery. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, a through gate passage process 2 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. In the through gate passage process 2 (S107), similarly to the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if a ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending a random number value used for a normal symbol winning lottery.

  In each of the through gate passing processes 2 (S107), in the processes of S601 to S604, the same processes as the respective processes of S601 to S604 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are respectively executed. . In the through gate passage process 2 (S107) of the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the second random number register R4 is changed. It is obtained from the general-purpose figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k (S631), and the process proceeds to S602.

  In the through gate passage process 2 (S107) in this embodiment, when the process of S604 is completed, the value of the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the free space of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The process is stored (S632), and the process ends. Through the through gate passage process 2 (see FIG. 58), various random numbers (various register values) generated by the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 can be acquired and used for lottery of ordinary symbols. By using a randomly generated random number for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

  Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main reselection processing (S131) is one of the timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the special symbol change start processing 2 (see FIG. 56). In the process for determining the variation pattern of the above, when the “reselection” is determined four or more consecutive times, the process for selecting the variation pattern based on the determination of the “reselection” for the fourth and subsequent times is performed. is there.

  In the main reselection process (S131), first, it is determined whether the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 2. If the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S4102), and the jackpot lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 are obtained. Then, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the above (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is “reselection” (S4104). If the determined variation pattern is a re-selection (S4104: Yes), the process is terminated. As described above, when “re-selection” is determined from the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the process is terminated while the main re-selection flag 203i is kept on, so that the next timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) In the main reselection process (S131) executed in (1), the process of reselecting the variation pattern can be performed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the determined variation pattern is not a re-selection (S4104: No), a variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern determined in the process of S4103 (S4105), and the setting is performed. A stop type command is set based on the displayed display mode (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to off (S4107), and this processing ends.

  Next, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. The main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is similar to the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, in which the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 executes main control of the game. Processing.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, in the processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915, the processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, each of the processes S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is abolished (deleted). In the present embodiment, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 is used for various lotteries, and it is not necessary to generate a random number value by software. Steps S910 and S911 are eliminated. This is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, except that these processes are abolished. As described above, in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, a random number value is generated by software by using the random number generation IC (the random number generation IC 900 for special figure and the random number generation IC 901 for ordinary figure). (S902, S910, and S911) can be unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 61, main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 in the second embodiment. In the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61), in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218, the same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, after executing the processes of S1201 to S1210, a later-described wait progress effect process is executed (S1231). Although the details will be described later, in the weight progress effect processing (S1231), a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed without starting the next change since the previous change pattern (change display) has been completed. In this case, the process is for setting a specific effect (weight effect effect).

  After the execution of the wait progress effect (S1231), a command determination process 2 (S1212) is performed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the processes after S1213 are performed. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. The command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment determines a command received from the main control device 110 and performs a command corresponding to the command type, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing control.

  In the command determination processing 2 (S1212) of the second embodiment, the processing of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 is performed in each of the processing of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing is performed.

  In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off. (S1332), this processing ends.

  In the command determination process 2 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1307 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1307: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333). ). If the stop command has been received (S1333: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a reserved ball based on the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S1334), and there is a reserved ball (that is, the special symbol reserved). When it is determined that the value of the ball counter 203c is 1 or more (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to off (S1335), and this processing ends. Also, in the processing of S1334, if it is determined that there is no pending ball (S1334: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  By setting the weight measurement flag 223h to ON for the retained ball, the previous variation is completed, and the state in which the variation pattern command is not received despite the presence of the reserved ball is counted (timed). be able to. In this embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (weight effect effect) is executed. Thus, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. Can be recognized by the player.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1333 that the stop command has not been received (S1333: No), the processing of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination processing 2 ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the weight progress effect processing (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the weight progress effect processing (S1231). The weight progress effect processing (S1231) is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect) as described above.

  In the weight progress effect processing (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the weight measurement flag 223h is turned on (S4201). In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), the processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is ON (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is set to 3000. It is determined whether it is greater than (S4203). In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that three seconds or more have elapsed since the previous variation pattern (variation display) was completed. I do. That is, it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received even though the time sufficient to receive the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 has passed. It is highly possible that a failure pattern command output from the main control device 110 could not be normally received due to a failure of the 110 or a failure abnormality (such as disconnection) such as a harness). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for notifying the player or the hall of the occurrence of the error is set (S4204), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is equal to or less than 3000 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205). If it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is greater than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the variation pattern command is issued despite the fact that 50 milliseconds have elapsed since the one second symbol stop period has elapsed. Means that it has not been received. That is, when the main controller 110 selects the fluctuation pattern (variation time), it is highly likely that “reselection” is continuously determined and the determination of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display weight progress effect command for setting display of a specific effect (weight progress effect) is set (S4206), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), the process ends.

  The display weight progress effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 (S1202). Are transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display announcement command, the display control device 114 displays a specific effect (weight progress effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed, despite the number of reserved balls being 1 or more, the weight elapse effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the wait elapsed time effect is not executed even if the fluctuation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed. Is also good. More specifically, if it is known in advance that the next change is a change to be a big hit, for example, by performing a look-ahead of the jackpot determination result, the wait progression effect may not be executed. As a result, the player once feels uncomfortable that the variable display is not started even though the number of reserved balls is 1 or more. Can be impressed as if it was a precursor to a jackpot. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the predetermined ratio (6/256) is determined in the predetermined determination (determination for determining the fluctuation pattern) of the main control device 110 that executes the main control related to the game. ) To select “reselect”. The number of determination values corresponding to the reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which a determination result is derived without being reselected is a perfect number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, the percentage is set to be an integer percentage (zero below the decimal point). Accordingly, when the probability of each determination result is expressed as a percentage, the value becomes a more easily understood value, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which specifications and the like can be more easily understood.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a fluctuating effect is started based on a winning of a game ball to a starting port. If the prize is not suspended, the variable production starts immediately after the prize is won (for example, within one second), and if the prize is suspended, immediately after the completion of the variable production based on the prize immediately before the suspension. (Eg, within one second).

  However, if the fluctuating effect does not start immediately after the end of the fluctuating effect based on the winning or after the winning immediately before the holding, the game will not be started even though it is usually the timing to start the game, There is a risk that the player will be distrusted.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reselection is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in the process of determining the fluctuation pattern of the main control device 110. For this reason, if “reselection” is determined continuously, the fluctuation pattern is not determined during that period, and the period from the end of one variable display to the start of the next variable display is long. As a result, the above-described problem occurs.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the fluctuation pattern command of the predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous fluctuation display is completed despite the fact that the number of reserved balls is one or more. When not performed, a specific effect (weight effect effect) is executed. Thus, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed even when the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. Can be recognized by the player. In addition, even if a fluctuation pattern command is notified immediately after the start of the effect, the effect that has little effect on the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command is an effect that can be ended immediately. Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or a plurality of stop symbols shines is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect (effect in which the design shines) without a story property or the like, even if a change pattern command is received during the effect and the change is started, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more, a specific effect (weight elapsed effect) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When "reselection" is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as a result of the lottery of the variation pattern, a specific effect (weight effect effect) may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the weight progress effect (the effect of shining the symbol) is executed when 1050 milliseconds have elapsed since the previous stop of the fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern command is not received, the fluctuation of the symbol may be started. As a result, the next fluctuation is started at the latest 1050 ms after the last symbol stop, so that the state of the symbol stop can be prevented (suppressed) from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game with ease without feeling uncomfortable.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment is configured to acquire random numbers used for performing lottery (decision) of the type of the announcement effect one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800 at the time of executing the lottery. Was.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values are acquired in advance from the random number generation IC 800 for effect, stored in the RAM 223, and the announcement effect is generated using the stored random value. Is executed. When a random number value is acquired in advance, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a random number value that is “re-lottery” (that is, a random number value in the range of “250 to 255”). Is configured to be stored in the RAM 223 only with respect to the random numbers for which is not determined (that is, random numbers in the range of “0 to 249”). That is, the value corresponding to “re-lottery” is discarded without being stored in the RAM 223. Accordingly, when the lottery (decision) process of the preview effect is actually performed, the “re-lottery” is not determined, and the determination of the preview effect is delayed due to the continuous “re-lottery”. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in configuration in that the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 for measuring the current time, and the audio ramp control The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 can measure the current time. The sound ramp control device 113 can acquire the time measured by the RTC 292. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when power is turned on (when a predetermined number (100) of random numbers are not stored in the RAM 223), a predetermined random number is produced in the RAM 223. It is configured to read from the counter initial value table 222c and store it. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random numbers stored in the RAM 223. In the present embodiment, different combinations of random numbers are set as initial values according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292. Thereby, the random number value set as the initial value can be made a more random value while quickly determining the initial value of the random number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65A, a description will be given of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter initial value table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. The effect counter initial value table 222c is a data table used to select an initial value of a random number value that is referred to when selecting a notice effect. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random numbers selectable as initial values are defined. All random numbers specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are in the range of “0 to 249”. That is, the random value set as the initial value is a random value outside the range of the random value for which “reselection” is determined (that is, “250 to 255”). Thereby, when selecting the type of the announcement effect, the type can be selected without selecting “reselection”, so that the processing time for determining (selecting) the announcement effect can be shortened.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the initial value is selected with reference to the effect counter initial value table 222c. The selected initial value is stored in an effect counter storage area 223i described later.

  Details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the prescribed contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect counter initial value table 222c, ten combinations (array Nos. 1 to 100) of 100 random numbers are defined (table Nos. 1 to 10). In the present embodiment, in the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on power-on, One of the tables 1 to 10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In addition, No. When acquiring any one of the tables 1 to 10, a table corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, if the last digit of the number of seconds in the power-on time is 1, the No. 1 is acquired, and if the last digit is 2, the table No. 1 is obtained. Two tables are obtained. Similarly, if the last digit is 3, the No. No. 3 if the last digit is 4 No. 4 if the last digit is 0 Ten tables are selected. Thereby, a combination of random numbers different each time can be set as an initial value in accordance with the timing of turning on the power, so that the type can be determined more randomly when determining (selecting) the announcement effect.

  The number of tables and the number of arrays in each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be 15 patterns or 5 patterns. The number of arrays may be 150 or 50.

  The method of selecting a table according to the current time is not limited to the method described above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of the millisecond of the power-on time. Thus, even when the power is turned on to a plurality of gaming machines at the same time, the tables selected by the respective gaming machines can be made different (a random value is set for each gaming machine).

  In the present embodiment, the table is selected according to the current time measured by the RTC 292, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection may be made according to the measurement results (temperature, humidity, light quantity, volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or the measurement results may be combined and selected. Further, the selection may be made based on the random number value generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number value may be generated by software processing and selected based on the random number value.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 223 in the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. I have.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing an effect counter value (an effect random number value) used when determining (selecting) a notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b. It consists of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. Each storage area stores one random number value (random value for effect) used to determine the type of the announcement effect. As for the random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 each time one random number value is used for selection of the announcement effect. The obtained random number value is overwritten on the storage area storing the random number value used for selecting the announcement effect (see S4305 in FIG. 69). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which 100 random number values generated at different timings are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

  The acquisition pointer 223j is a pointer indicating which one of the 100 random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is to be selected. When selecting the type of the announcement effect, the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, the effect random number value is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the judgment value specified in the announcement effect selection table 222b is determined. The type of the announcement effect is determined based on the (random value). The value of the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by one each time a random number value of 1 is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223i in order to determine the type of the announcement effect. Thereby, the effect random number can be set to a more random value.

  The reacquisition flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (ie, a range of “250 to 255”). If the reacquisition flag 223k is on, it means that the acquired effect random number value is a value corresponding to “reselection”, and it is necessary to acquire the effect random number value from the effect random number generation IC 800 again. I do. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not necessary to re-acquire the effect random number value. The reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (S4304 in FIG. 69). In addition, when the value within the range of “0 to 249” is acquired by reacquiring the effect random number value, the value is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 67, start-up processing 3 in the sound lamp control device according to the third embodiment will be described.

  In the start-up processing 3 of the third embodiment, in each of the steps S1101 to S1111, the same processing as each of the steps S1101 to S1111 of the start-up processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment is executed. In the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 is completed, next, time information corresponding to the current time is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the obtained time information. Then, from the effect counter initial value table 222c, a combination of initial values for 100 effect random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected and stored in the effect counter initial value table 222c (initial value is set) (S1132). ). When the processing in S1132 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S1111.

  In the start-up process 3, by selecting a combination of initial values prescribed in the ROM 222 in advance and setting the combination in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect random number generation IC 800 sets one initial value of the effect random number. The initial value of the effect random number can be determined more quickly than in the case of acquiring one. Therefore, it is possible to shift to a state in which the player can execute the game earlier.

  Next, the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218 in the respective processings of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1218 to S1218 is executed.

  In the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, when the random number value for effect stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i is updated, it corresponds to “reselection”. When the effect random number value has been acquired, the effect random number value is acquired again, and a reacquisition process for updating the effect counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to S1212 and thereafter. The details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 69, a description will be given of a preview effect selection process 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment. This announcement effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) instead of the announcement effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and is performed in the first embodiment. Similar to the announcement effect selection process in the embodiment (see FIG. 33), this is a process for selecting the type of the announcement effect from the effect random number value generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying the display control device 114 of the selection.

  In the announcement effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, among the 100 effect random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect randomness stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j. A numerical value is obtained (S4301). Next, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new effect random number value (S4302), and the acquired register value is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”). It is determined whether or not there is (S4303).

  In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the acquired register value (the random number value for effect) is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, re-acquisition of the effect random number value is set (S4304), and the flow shifts to the process of S4306. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the register value obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 is outside the range of “reselection” (that is, within the range of “0 to 249”) (S4303: No) Then, the acquired register value is stored as a new effect random number value in a storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. I do.

  In the process of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether or not the updated value of the acquisition pointer 223j is greater than 100 (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is greater than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquisition pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process shifts to S4309. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is equal to or less than 100 (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4309.

  In the process of S4309, it is determined whether or not the variable effect for setting the notice effect is a variable effect for notifying the jackpot (whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot) (S4309). If it is determined that there is a notification effect (S4309: Yes), the announcement effect is determined based on the jackpot announcement effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11B) and the effect random number (effect counter) acquired in the process of S4301. The type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4309 that the hit is not a jackpot (S4309: No), the announcement notice effect selection table 222b2 for departure (see FIG. 11C) and the effect random number value acquired in the process of S4301 ( Effect counter), a preview effect is selected (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S4312), and this process ends.

  Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this re-acquisition process (S1261) is performed when the effect random number value corresponding to “re-selection” is acquired when updating the effect random number value stored in the previous effect counter storage area 223i. This is a process for acquiring the effect random number value again and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

  In this reacquisition process (S1261), first, it is determined whether or not the reacquisition flag is set to 223k on (S4401). To end. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the reacquisition flag 223k is ON (S4401: Yes), a register value (effect random number value) is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800 (S4402). Next, it is determined whether or not the register value acquired in the process of S4402 is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, “250 to 255”) (S4403), and a value corresponding to “reselection” is determined. If this is the case (S4403: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the acquired register value is out of the range of “reselection” (that is, “0 to 249”) (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read, The register value (random number for effect) acquired in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to off (S4405), and this processing ends.

  By this re-acquisition processing (S1261), only the effect random number value outside the range of “reselection” can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i from the effect random number generation IC 800, so that the effect is selected when the notice effect is selected. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect random number value read from the counter storage area 223i from becoming a value corresponding to “reselection”. Therefore, any of the types of the preview effects (notification effects A to C) can be always selected (determined) by the process of selecting one preview effect, so that the processing time can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of effect random number values are stored in advance in the effect counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in advance. The lottery (decision) of the announcement effect is executed using the effected random number value for the effect. By storing a plurality of (100) random numbers in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the random number values are not stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, so that each announcement effect is determined. Determination (determination) can be performed normally in the processing for this. In addition, each time the stored random number value is used for determining the announcement effect, the used random number value is discarded, a new random number value is obtained from the effect random number generation IC 800, and the effect counter storage area 223i is overwritten. Is configured. By sequentially overwriting (updating) the contents, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the same random number value from being repeatedly used for determination, and thus it is possible to ensure the randomness of the effect random number value.

  The effect counter storage area 223i is controlled to store only a value outside the range of the random value for which “reselection” is determined (that is, a random value in the range of “0 to 249”). . With this configuration, if one random number value is acquired from a predetermined number of random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the type of the advance effect can be determined by executing only one announcement effect determination. (That is, any of the announcement effects A to C can be determined without determining “reselection”). Therefore, the time required for the process of determining the type of the announcement effect can be reduced, so that the type of the announcement effect can be reliably notified to the display control device 114 by the start timing of the announcement effect.

  In this embodiment, the initial value of the effect random number stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222, and the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67). Is configured to transfer any combination of the initial values specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c to the effect counter storage area 223i. In addition, all the effect random numbers specified in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values (“0 to 249”) within a range of any determination result (any of the announcement effects A to C is determined). (Value within the range). With this configuration, the time required to store the initial values in the effect counter storage area 223i can be reduced as compared with the case where the initial values are obtained one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800. When the configuration is such that the initial values are acquired one by one from the effect random number generation IC 800, every time a random number value is acquired, it is determined whether or not the value corresponds to “reselection”, and “reselection” is performed. This is because it is necessary to newly acquire a random number value until a random number value within a range (within a range of “0 to 249”) that results in any of the determination results is obtained. By shortening the time for storing the predetermined number (100) of the initial values of the effect random numbers in the effect counter storage area 223i, it is possible to shorten the period until the pachinko machine 10 can play a game.

  In the present embodiment, 100 random numbers are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. However, the number is not limited to 100 and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value (so-called hard random number value) generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 is stored in the effect counter storage area 223i in a predetermined number (100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a configuration may be made in which a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random number values generated by software processing (so-called software random number values) are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Generally, the random number value of the software is added one by one in the processing of the software. Therefore, when the value of the software random number is acquired again in order to re-select the lottery result, there is a high possibility that the random number value has not been sufficiently updated. That is, a random value that is a random value cannot be obtained. Thus, by storing the random number value in the effect counter storage area 223i in advance as in the present embodiment, a random number value that is a random value can be obtained even when the lottery result is re-drawn.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, when a winning start is detected, various kinds of information (various counter values) used for a lottery of a special symbol are obtained, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. Is detected, the information (the value of the second random number counter C4) used for the lottery of the normal symbol is acquired. In other words, different acquisition operations are performed depending on whether a winning start is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all random numbers are collectively acquired and detected when the start winning is detected or when the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. Is used for a lottery (judgment) in accordance with the random number. By adopting a configuration in which random numbers are read in a lump regardless of whether the winning is the start or the passing through the through gate 67, the random number obtaining operation can be performed in debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10. Can be checked together.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in configuration is that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are provided in the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the output port 205, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and a partial process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is a change from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a universal figure random number generation IC 901 are provided to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 and the ordinary figure random number generation IC 901 are the same as the ICs having the same names provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, various counter values in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in the present embodiment, the values of the registers (the first random number register R1, the first random type register R2, and the stop type) are provided in the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901. The type selection register R3, the fluctuation type register RS1, and the value of the second random number register R4 are used as random numbers (first random number counter C1, first first type counter C2, and stop type selection in the first embodiment). The counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4) are acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. These counter values are collectively acquired from each IC at the same timing and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

  When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the start winning, the first random number register R1 and the first random number register R1 out of the stored register values (random number values). Each value of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 is stored in an empty area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p due to the detection of the ball entering the through gate 67, the value of the second random number register R4 is normally stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Is stored in an empty area.

  Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value, the configuration is such that the values (random number values) of all the registers are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Can be omitted to determine whether a value (random number value) should be obtained by specifying the register value, so that the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) or the like in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the acquisition operation of the random number value (register value) can be collectively confirmed.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Also, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided instead of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment.

  The special figure continuous clear counter 203n is a continuous number of times that the collective acquisition of various register values based on the passage of the through gate 67 has been performed (that is, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is continuously performed without performing the random selection of the special symbol). This is a counter for counting the number of times that the number has been increased. As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter values (register values) used for the lottery of the special symbol and the lottery of the ordinary symbol are configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition trigger. For this reason, it is intentionally caused to pass through the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily satisfied, and the first random number (register value) used for the lottery of the jackpot among the acquired random number values (register value) There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 is illegally analyzed from outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, it is analyzed from the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900 to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally allocated. . In order to prevent this misconduct, in the present embodiment, the number of times a ball continuously passes through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. This makes it possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the jackpot is obtained and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot.

  The initial value of this special figure continuous clear counter 203n is set to 0, and in the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75), of the counter values (register values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Each time the value of the second random number register R4 is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the value is incremented by one (see S664 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), various counter values (register values) used for the lottery of special symbols are initialized to 0 each time they are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (see FIG. 74). See S463).

  As described above, the counter temporary storage area 203p is a storage area for temporarily storing the register values (random number values) obtained from the special-purpose random number generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901. The various register values (random numbers) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p are stored in a corresponding storage area (special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b) according to the timing of acquiring the value. ).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 74, start winning processing 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. This start winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  In the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S401 to S405 are the same as the processes in S401 to S405 in the start winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The processing is executed. In the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, after executing the process of S401, the respective values of the first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are specially mapped. It is obtained from the random number generation IC 900 for general use and the random number generation IC 901 for general drawing, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S461).

  Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in this embodiment, when the process of S405 ends, the first random number register R1 and the first type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461. Then, each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S462). Next, after the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process 4 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 4 in the fourth embodiment. This through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

  In the through gate passage processing 4 (S107), in each processing of S601 to S604, the same processing as each processing of S601 to S604 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. In the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), then the first random number register R1 , The first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are respectively obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. (S661).

  In the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when the processing in S604 ends, the second random number register R4 of the various register values stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the processing in S661. Is stored in the first area of the free symbol storage area 203b of the normal symbol storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (first storage area to fourth storage area) (S662). Then, each register value stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuation clear counter 203n is not 10 or more (S665: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666), and this processing ends.

  In this way, by configuring so as to notify an error when the normal symbol lottery is executed 10 or more times in succession, the register values of the register values acquired collectively upon passing through the through gate 67 can be obtained. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an illegal act of analyzing the value of the first random number register R1. More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery is configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition trigger. . For this reason, it is intentionally caused to pass through the through gate 67 where the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easily satisfied, and the first random number (register value) used for the lottery of the jackpot among the acquired random number values (register value) There is a possibility that the value of the random number register R1 is illegally analyzed from outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, it is analyzed from the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900 to the timing when the register value corresponding to the jackpot is reached, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally allocated. . In order to prevent this misconduct, in the present embodiment, the number of times a ball continuously passes through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of action and set an error display. This makes it possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the jackpot is obtained and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all register values (random number values) are collectively collected when a winning start is detected or when passing through the through gate 67 is detected. The information is acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, and is transferred to a storage area (either the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) according to the detected content. . Regardless of the trigger for obtaining the register value (random number value), all register values (random number values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, so that when register values are obtained, Since the process of determining whether a value (random value) should be obtained by designating a register can be omitted, the register value (random value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, in debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the acquisition operation of the register value (random number value) can be collectively confirmed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 in FIG. 19) executed at a specific occasion of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the start winning of the game ball and the passage through the through gate 67 are performed. Detected. When a winning start is detected, the register values of the random number generating ICs (the random number generating IC 900 for special figure and the random number generating IC 901 for ordinary figure) are acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74). Is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC is acquired in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75). Here, as for each register value in each random number generation IC, the random number value stored twice at a frequency of 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is updated. This update interval (time) is obtained after the register value (random number value) of each random number generation IC is obtained in the start winning processing 4 (see FIG. 74), and then in the through gate passage processing 4 (see FIG. 75). Is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random value) is obtained. As a result, in the same timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19), even when the starting prize of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the register values (based on the starting prize) respectively obtained. It is possible to make the register value (random value) different from the register value (random value) obtained based on the passage through the through gate 67.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC is used in which the random number value stored at a frequency of twice every 10 μs (a period of 200 kHz) is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update the random number value at the timing when the random number value is obtained from main controller 110 may be used. That is, a random number generation IC that can generate a random number value at an arbitrary timing may be used. Thereby, the frequency of updating and generating the random number value can be minimized, and the power consumption can be reduced. Further, the random number generation IC 900 having a different update timing from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the ordinary figure random number generation IC 901 may be used. For example, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is updated at a frequency of 1 μs (1 MHz cycle), and the general figure random number generation IC 901 is updated at a frequency of 2 μs (500 kHz cycle). It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generating IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generating IC 901 are used as the random number generating ICs so that the random number values to be generated can be collectively obtained. It is not limited to two types. The number of random number generation ICs may be more than three or one. For example, one type of random number generation IC is used, that is, the random number generation ICs are integrated into one. Accordingly, in the process of collectively obtaining each random number value from the random number generation IC, each random number value is accessed only by accessing one random number generation IC, compared to obtaining each random number value from a plurality of random number generation ICs. They can be acquired at once, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the start winning processing 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through gate passing processing 4 (see FIG. 75), when the condition for obtaining the random number value (register value) is satisfied, the special figure random number is set. The configuration is such that all random number values (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 are collectively acquired.

  In addition to this, in the present modification, when a condition for obtaining a random number value is satisfied, the acquisition of a random number value (register value) and the storage of the random number value are executed in the same one process (winning process). It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. Further, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( (Register value) can be used to store the corresponding random numbers, thereby reducing the processing load.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 76, a description will be given of a timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing 5 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment. Note that the same parts as those of the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the timer interrupt processing 5, similarly to the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), first, the switch read processing of S101 is executed, and then the winning processing is executed (SS161). Next, a special symbol variation process is executed (S104), a normal symbol variation process is executed (S106), a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed. (S109), the timer interrupt processing 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a prize-winning process (161) which is one of the timer interrupt processes 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning process (S161) in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

  The winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 76), and determines whether or not there is a prize at the first entrance 64 (start prize) or a pass through the through gate 67. Then, when a winning or passing is made, various random number values are collectively acquired from each random number generating IC (the random number generating IC for special figure 900 and the random number generating IC for general figure 901), and the first random number is obtained by using the various random number values. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to winning at the ball opening 64 (starting winning) and passing through the through gate 67. By the winning process (S161), in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), when the starting winning of the game ball and the passing of the through gate 67 are detected, the starting winning and the passing of the through gate 67 are determined. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where each register value (random number value) is obtained from each random number generation IC based on the respective values.

  When the winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 or has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 or passed the through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first random number register R1, the first type register R2, and the stop type selection register R3. Then, each value of the second random number register R4 is obtained from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance (S4503). If the ball has not won the first entrance (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4509 without executing the processes of S4504 to S4508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4505).

  If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S4503: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the special symbol retaining ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S4507), and in the process of S4501, the first random number register R1 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, The respective values of the per-type register R2 and the stop type register R3 are stored in the first area of the free symbol holding area 203a (the first area to the fourth area) (S4508). Move on to processing. In the process of S4508, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S4509, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through gate 67 (S4509). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4511).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4511). : No), and proceeds to the process of S4514. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is turned off. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S4512). Then, in the process of S4502, the value of the second random number register R4 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is stored in the empty symbol storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the first area to the fourth area). Is stored in the first area (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when the condition for obtaining the random number value is satisfied, the random number value (register value) is obtained and the random number value is obtained in the same one process (winning process). And configured to execute storing. Accordingly, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer during development can be reduced. Further, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 and passed through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( (Register value) can be used to store the corresponding random numbers, thereby reducing the processing load.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when selecting a notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b, “reselect” is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the mode of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 222a, “reselection” can be determined. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which "re-selection" is determined differs depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, the effect of different modes is executed in accordance with the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined. With this, it is possible to predict whether it is a jackpot or a miss according to the effect mode at the time of the super reach, so that the player can be noticed more by the effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 78A, in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, a pseudo variation complementing effect selection table 222d is provided. The pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines a pseudo fluctuation display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is. Also, the announcement effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is abolished.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), a variable reselection flag 223m and a variable reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment. 223e and the notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

  The variable reselection flag 223m is a flag indicating whether “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3. If the variable reselection flag 223m is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 (the type (form) of super reach has not been determined), and if it is off, This means that “reselection” has not been determined (the type (aspect) of super reach has been determined). The initial value of the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to off, and “reselection” is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3 in the fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach. When it is set to ON (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, in the variable reselection process (see FIG. 84), if any of the super reach types (super reach types A to C) is determined, it is set to off (see S5110 in FIG. 84). By referring to the variable reselection flag 223m, when "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3, the super reach type is reselected (reselected) in the variable reselection processing (see FIG. 84). Lottery) can be executed.

  The variation reselection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times the process of reselecting the type of the variation effect (re-lotting) is continued. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times "reselection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 during the period from when the variation pattern command is received to when the type of the variation pattern is determined. As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that a variation pattern in a different mode is set according to the number of times “reselection” is determined. The number of times "reselection" is determined is determined by the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The fluctuation reselection counter 223n is incremented by one each time the fluctuation reselection processing is executed (see S5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when any variation pattern mode is selected in the variation reselection process, the value is initialized to 0 (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

  Next, a variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 79A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79A, the variation pattern selection table 222a according to the present embodiment displays the variation pattern display mode when the variation pattern command notified from the main control device 110 is a command indicating complete departure. The normal variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selection, the normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern when the normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command. In this case, the super reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern when the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 (b) to (d), details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79B, the super reach selection table 222a3 is referred to when a hit super reach is notified, and is referred to when a missed super reach is notified. And a super-reach selection table 222a3b. In each table, the variation pattern types (super reach types A to C) are defined in association with the values of the effect random numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), in the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, the super reach type A is associated with the effect random number value in the range of “0 to 60”, and in the range of “61 to 120”. Are associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “121 to 180”. Further, “reselection” is associated with the remaining range of “181 to 255”. If one of the super reach types is assigned to the entire range of the production random number value “0 to 255”, the ratio of each super reach type is set to, for example, 3 due to the restriction on the number of the production random value. It cannot be equally distributed (1: 1: 1) for each type. That is, the ratio of each super reach type cannot be set freely.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each of the super reach types A to C is set by setting 60 random number values for determining the super reach types A to C and distributing the remaining random value to “reselection”. Can be made equal (the selection ratio of the super reach types A to C is 1: 1: 1).

  The selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1: 1: 1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined radix and allocating a multiple of the effect random number to each super reach type. For example, it is assumed that 30 is set as a predetermined radix, and that a super reach type A: a super reach type B: a super reach type C = 1: 2: 4 is set as a selection ratio. In this case, 30 (30 × 1) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type A, and 60 (30 × 2) effect random number values are assigned to the super reach type B. 120 (30 × 4) effect random numbers may be assigned to the reach type C. Also, the remaining 46 (256-30-60-120) effect random numbers for effect may be assigned to “reselection”. With this configuration, it is possible to realize the selected selection ratio (ie, 1: 2: 4) without generating a fraction.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (d), in the super-reach selection table for departure 222a3b, the super-reach type A is associated with the effect random number value in the range of “0 to 80” and the range of “81 to 160”. Is associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “161 to 240”. Further, “reselection” is associated with the remaining range of “241 to 255”. That is, 80 random number values for effect are assigned to each super reach type. Thus, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly set to 1: 1: 1 as in the case of the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a.

  Note that the out-of-reach super reach selection table 222a3b is configured so that the probability of "reselection" being determined is lower (at the time of a big hit: 76/256, at the time of a departure: 16/256). Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect with a high degree of expectation of a jackpot as “reselection” is determined continuously. Therefore, if "reselection" is easily selected despite the departure, the situation is likely to be eventually notified of the departure despite the execution of a highly anticipated effect, and the player is dissatisfied. There is a risk of being hugged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of “reselection” being determined in the case of a miss is reduced compared to the case of a jackpot, and the player is given an excessive sense of expectation in the case of a miss. Is prevented (suppressed). Thereby, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), details of the above-described pseudo-variation complementing effect selection table 222d will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d includes at least a jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 and an off-line complementary effect selection table 222d2. The pseudo fluctuation supplement effect selection table 222d is a data table for determining a display mode of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the super reach.

  In the present embodiment, when “re-selection” is determined when selecting a 60-second fluctuating effect mode corresponding to super reach, a fake fluctuating effect for 15 seconds (after the symbol is fluctuated and displayed, “3” is selected) , "4", and "1" are set (a display effect that is stopped and displayed in a combination of so-called main symbols). The pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a display mode after the pseudo fluctuation display for 15 seconds is completed.

  The jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 is data that defines the number of pseudo variable displays displayed during a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the hit super reach in association with the number of determinations of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is within the range of “0 to 3” before the mode of the hit super reach is determined from the super hit reach reach selection table 222a3a. If, the complementary effect A is set as the display mode during super reach. In this supplementary effect A, the fluctuating display (pseudo stop) is not performed once in the range of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuating, and the fluctuating display in which the symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed is executed. It is an aspect. In other words, the variable display is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance is stopped and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed are performed twice in total. You.

  In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is in the range of “4 to 6”, a complementary effect B in which a pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. When the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be in the range of “7 to 9”, the complementary effect C in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. In the range in which the number of times of “reselection” is determined to be “10 or more”, a complementary effect D in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed three times within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. You.

  As described above, the winning super reach has a higher probability of being “reselected” when determining the type of the super reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the number of times of pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) increases as "reselection" is continuously determined. Therefore, as the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) increases, the degree of expectation of the player for the jackpot can be increased, so that the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) can be focused on. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a monotonous game.

  The supplementary effect selection table for out-of-office 222d2 is a data in which the number of pseudo fluctuation display displayed during the period of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the out-of-reach super-reach change is defined in association with the number of times of “reselection”. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the number of times that “reselection” is continuously determined is in the range of “0 to 3” before the mode of the out-of-reach super reach is determined from the out-of-reach super reach selection table 222a3b. If it is, the pseudo effect of displaying the fluctuation (pseudo stop) is not performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is finally stopped and displayed is executed. A is selected. In other words, the variable display is executed for the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the pseudo fluctuation display in which the chance is stopped is displayed, and the fluctuation display in which the symbol indicating the departure is stopped is displayed twice in total. You.

  In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is in the range of “4 to 6”, a complementary effect B in which a pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is selected. In the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is “7 or more”, a complementary effect C in which pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. You. That is, in the out-of-range super reach, the total of the pseudo fluctuation display executed during 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation and the pseudo fluctuation display executed during the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds (the number of times the chance eyes are displayed) ) Is configured to be a maximum of three times (one less than the upper limit of the number of hits per super reach). Therefore, in one superreach, when a chance is displayed four times, it is determined that a big hit will occur, so that the player pays attention to the number of pseudo variable display (the number of times of display of the chance). be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 81, the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In S1201 to S1210, S1212, and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, S1201 to S1210, S1212, and S1201 in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processes as those of S1214 to S1218 are executed. Further, in the main processing 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S1210 is completed, next, if “reselection” is determined in the previous selection processing of the super reach mode, the production disturbance A variable re-selection process for newly acquiring a numerical value and selecting a super reach mode is executed again (S1291), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 6 (see FIG. 84) in the present embodiment, after performing the command determination process (S1212), the variable display setting process 6 is performed (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214 and thereafter. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the above-described variable display setting process 6 (S1213). The variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting a display variation pattern command based on the obtained variation pattern command.

  Of the variable display setting processing 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment, in each of S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410, S1401 to S1405 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing of each of S1407 to S1410 is executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1403 ends, the detailed mode of the variation pattern is then determined based on the variation pattern (variation time) extracted in the process of S1403. (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1404 and thereafter. Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the above-described variation pattern selection process (S1431). By this variation pattern selection process (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command from main controller 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as an effect random number value (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S1403 of the fluctuation display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 82) is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (S5002).

  In the process of S5002, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variation pattern notified by the current variation pattern command is not super-reach (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted variation type is set in the variation pattern table 222a. It selects from each table, determines (selects) the display mode of the variation pattern based on the selected table and the effect random number value acquired in the process of S5001, and ends this process (S5004).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5002, when it is determined that the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (S5002: Yes), the random number for effect acquired by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, The mode of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the random number is determined (selected) (S5003). As described above, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a hit super reach, the super hit reach reach selection table 222a3a and the random number value for effect are compared. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a departure super reach, the departure super reach selection table 222a3b is compared with the effect random number value.

  When the processing of S5003 is completed, it is determined whether or not “re-selection” is determined (selected) from the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a or the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b (S5005). Is determined (S5005: Yes), a pseudo fluctuation pattern (a pseudo fluctuation display for 15 seconds stopped and displayed at the chance) executed during 15 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is selected (S5006), and the fluctuation is performed. The reselection flag 223m is set to ON (S5007), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the one determined (selected) from the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a or the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b is not “reselection” (S5005: No) Then, a mode in which the pseudo fluctuation display is not executed and the fluctuation display for 60 seconds is executed (long super-reach mode) is selected (determined) as the display mode of the current fluctuation pattern (S5008), and the present process ends. .

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern to be selected is made different depending on whether or not “reselection” is determined at the time of selecting the mode of the first variation pattern. (15 second pseudo fluctuation pattern or 60 second long super reach). By setting a short pseudo fluctuation pattern for 15 seconds when "reselection" is selected, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the mode of the fluctuation pattern during the 15 seconds. When “reselection” is selected, the variation reselection process (S1291) that is repeated until the mode of the variation pattern is selected is executed every millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81). Therefore, even if re-selection is repeated up to 15000 times in 15 seconds, a variation pattern can be selected. The probability of determining “reselection” is 76/256 in the case of the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a, and 16/256 in the case of the departure super-reach selection table 222a3b. For this reason, the probability of "reselection" being determined 5,000 times in succession is about 1 / 2.5 × 10 7911 even in the case of a jackpot with a high probability, which is low enough to be statistically negligible. . Therefore, by setting the mode of the pseudo variation pattern for 5 seconds when “reselection” is determined, it is possible to secure time for executing the process of reselecting the aspect of the variation pattern. In addition, the pseudo fluctuation effect for 15 seconds is set in the same mode (the mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed) as the pseudo fluctuation effect that may be executed 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the effect in which the chance eyes are continuously displayed.

  Next, the details of the variable reselection process (S1291) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, in the variable reselection process (S1291), when “reselection” is determined in the process of selecting the previous super reach mode, a random number value for effect is newly acquired and the super reach This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In this variation reselection process (S1291), first, it is determined whether or not the variation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101). If it is determined to be off (S5101), the mode of the variation pattern is reselected. Since this means that there is no need to perform this processing, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is ON (S5101), the fluctuation pattern is selected in the previous fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) or the fluctuation reselection processing (see FIG. 84). Is selected (selected) when selecting the mode, the mode of the variation pattern is undecided. First, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is newly set as the effect random number value. (S5102), and then adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n (S5103), thereby updating the number of times "reselection" is continuously determined (selected).

  When the processing of S5103 is completed, the random number for effect newly acquired by the process of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79 (b) to (d)), and the randomization for effect is performed. A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination (selection) by the processing of S5104 is “reselection” (S5105). If the result is “reselection” (S5105: Yes), the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the determined (selected) is not “reselection” (that is, any of the super reach types A to C is determined (selected)) (S5105: No) Comparing the value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n with the pseudo fluctuation complementing effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c)) to execute the pseudo 15 An effect (pseudo-fluctuation complementing effect) in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0 to 3 times by the dynamic fluctuation display is selected (S5106).

  When the process of S5106 is completed, next, a 20-second super-reach mode (short super-reach mode) corresponding to the selected type of the pseudo-variation complementing effect is selected (S5107). In this short super reach, in the case of a departure super reach, a combination of stop symbols indicating a departure is finally stopped and displayed, and in a case of a hit super reach, a stop symbol indicating a large hit is finally stopped and displayed. This short super reach mode is started from a state in which the symbol is changing. At the same time, in each of the pseudo fluctuation supplementary effects (complementary effects A to D), a state in which the symbol is changing at the end of the execution period (40 seconds after the start of the change) is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the switching from the pseudo-variation complementing effect to the short super-reach mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable in the display mode at the time of the super reach, and to play the game with confidence.

  After the processing of S5107, a display fluctuation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the pseudo fluctuation complementing effect mode selected in the processing of S5106 and the short super reach mode selected in the processing of S5107 is issued. The variable reselection counter 223n is initialized to 0 (S5109), the variable reselection flag 223m is set to off (S5110), and the process ends.

  By the change reselection process (S1291), different change patterns can be displayed according to the number of times of “reselection”, so that various effect forms can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the variation of the variation pattern is selected by the sound lamp control device 113, It is configured such that “reselection” is determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which "re-selection" is determined differs depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, the effect of different modes is executed in accordance with the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined. With this, it is possible to predict whether it is a jackpot or a miss according to the effect mode at the time of the super reach, so that the player can be noticed more by the effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the mode of the fluctuation pattern during the 15 seconds. Further, since the effect of the 15 seconds is set to the same system as the pseudo-variation complementing effect set after the lapse of the period, the 15-second effect and the subsequent pseudo-variation complementing effect are related to each other. Can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the contents of the effect, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the “reselection” is determined, one pseudo fluctuation display is executed in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but the pseudo fluctuation display is performed. It is not limited to one time, and may be executed two or more times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation effect (the number of times of displaying a chance) is set to a maximum of four times, but the number of times of display can be set to an arbitrary number.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value found in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  It is to be noted that each of the above-described embodiments and each of the control examples or a part thereof may be combined. Furthermore, although the control device is constituted by a plurality of control devices, the control device may be constituted by one integrated control device or some integrated control devices.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group>
A generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range, an obtaining means for obtaining the determination value generated by the generating means, and a setting in which the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is predetermined. A gaming machine having: a discriminating unit for discriminating whether the value matches the set value; and a control unit for executing a process set in accordance with the set value when the discriminating unit determines that the value matches the set value. When it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the obtaining unit obtains the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The number set to the specific determination value having the acquisition control means that controls the means, for the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, Said Gaming machine A1, wherein the ratio of the number set in the value is one that is set to be an integer.

  Here, for example, there are known gaming machines that perform various kinds of lotteries such as a lottery of winning or not based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port, a lottery of a mode of a display effect, and the like. In such a lottery, it is determined whether a value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined setting value, and when the determination value matches the setting value, the corresponding value is used. (For example, determination of the effect mode) is executed (for example, JP-A-2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of predetermined setting values to the number of possible determination values (that is, the probability of various lottery results) is a fraction or decimal number. ) Usually occurred. That is, the probabilities (percentages) of various lottery results could not be converted into integers. However, in the development stage of a gaming machine, it is general to design the ratio of each lottery result as a percentage (percentage). For this reason, when the designer allocates the number of set values that will be various lottery results in the development stage of the gaming machine, the probability of each lottery result designed as a percentage (percentage) and the judgment value of each determination value according to the percentage are determined. There is a possibility that it may be difficult for the designer to intuitively understand the correspondence relationship with the number. That is, the design may become inefficient.

  Also, when announcing the probability (ratio) of each lottery result, it is common to announce the numerical value converted to a percentage, but if the percentage has a fraction (decimal point), Depending on how to round down the decimal point, the sum of the percentages may not be 100%, and the notation may be difficult to understand for the player.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the generating unit obtains a newly generated determination value. The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means. Here, the number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  Thus, the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is easy to understand intuitively, and thus there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player. That is, there is an effect that the set value can be set appropriately.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein in the gaming machine A1, the generation means updates the determination value in a shorter time than a shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generation unit in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit obtains the determination value. It is possible to prevent the same determination value from being obtained a plurality of times by the obtaining unit before the execution. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the result of the determination by the determination unit from being biased.

  In the control processing executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, a plurality of different control processings are set, and each of the control processings executable by the control means has one or more set values. A gaming machine A3, wherein the assigned control means executes the control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.

  Thus, different control processes can be executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means, so that there is an effect that various control processes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine A3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is determined by the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine A4 wherein the ratio is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is set to the number of determination values in a predetermined range and a specific determination value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference from the set number is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  Number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined by the determination unit to match the predetermined set value in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4 A game machine A5 comprising: a number counting means for counting the number of times; and a determination ending means for terminating the determination by the determination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the number counting means has reached a specific number.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. The determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination termination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the means has reached the specific number.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the specific determination value is continuously determined and the other control processing cannot be executed during that time.

  A game machine A6 comprising: an execution control means for causing the control means to execute a specific control when the judgment by the judgment means is ended by the judgment end means in the game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, when the determination by the determination unit is completed by the determination ending unit, the execution control unit causes the control unit to execute specific control. There is an effect that control can be performed normally even when the determination is completed without the determined value being equal to the determined set value.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific determination value is a difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, A gaming machine A7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. Since the ratio of the number set in the set value to the number difference is set to be an integer in percentage notation, the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  A display unit for displaying a display effect on any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, and an effect executing unit for executing the display effect on the display unit; and the control unit controls the display effect performed by the effect executing unit. A gaming machine A8 wherein a type set in accordance with the set value is selected as the type.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, the display effect is executed by the effect executing means on the display means for displaying the display effect. As the type of the display effect executed by the effect executing means, the type set by the control means in accordance with the set value is selected.

  Thus, there is an effect that the ratio at which the display effect is selected can be set to a value that is easy for the player to understand.

  A plurality of control means for repeatedly executing a plurality of control processes including a determination by the determination means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8 in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, wherein the acquisition control means has the determination value acquired by the acquisition means Is determined to be the specific determination value different from the set value, after performing another control process based on the predetermined control procedure, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit The gaming machine A9, characterized in that the gaming machine A9 controls the acquisition means so as to acquire the information.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, a plurality of control processes including a determination by the determination unit are repeatedly executed by the multiple control units according to a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process based on a predetermined control procedure is performed, and then a new generation process is performed by the generation unit. The acquisition control unit controls the acquisition unit to acquire the determined determination value.

  Thereby, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress acquiring a new determination value without performing another control process, and thus delay other control processes. There is an effect that the program can be executed normally without any processing.

<Characteristic B group> (sub-side starts pseudo fluctuation based on the lapse of fixed intervals)
A main control unit for executing game control; and a peripheral control unit for executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control unit, wherein the main control unit sets a determination value in a predetermined range. Generating means for updating and generating, obtaining means for obtaining the determination value based on satisfaction of an obtaining condition from the generating means, and storage means for storing determination value information based on the determination value obtained from the obtaining means And when the determination value information is stored in the storage means, the number information signal generation means for generating a number information signal indicating the number of the stored determination value information, and the determination value information acquired from the acquisition means Display means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying on a display means identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period thereof. Advantageous benefits for the player when the period information signal generating means for generating the period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the determining means and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means The peripheral control means in the gaming machine having the privilege display means, the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, After a predetermined period of time elapses after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the display means displays the dynamics of the effect symbol on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. A game machine B1 comprising: an effect symbol dynamic display means for starting a target display.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a variable effect is started based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port. If the prize is not suspended, the variable production starts immediately after the prize is won (for example, within one second), and if the prize is suspended, immediately after the completion of the variable production based on the prize immediately before the suspension ( Usually, the processing is started within one second (for example, JP-A-2009-050734). In such a gaming machine, the instruction to start the variable effect is delayed, and if the variable effect is not started promptly, an impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally is given to the player, There was a risk of giving distrust.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display period and the identification information indicated by the received period information signal are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the identification information has been completed, the effect is displayed on the display means by the effect design dynamic display means on condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means. Dynamic display of symbols is started.

  Thus, when the predetermined period has elapsed without receiving the period information signal, it is possible to recognize that the operation is normal by dynamic display of the effect symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means corresponds to the set value when the determination means determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means matches a predetermined set value. The main control means determines the dynamic display period. When the main control means determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control means newly determines the dynamic display period by the generation means. The acquisition control means for controlling the acquisition means so as to acquire the determination value generated in the above, the number set to the specific determination value, the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination A gaming machine B2, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value to the difference from the number set in the value is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, when it is determined by the determining unit that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit matches the predetermined set value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. Here, when the main control unit determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control unit obtains the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The means are controlled by the acquisition control means. The number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

  As a result, the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be made an integer, so that when the ratio of the dynamic display period is designed in the development stage of a gaming machine, the design can be efficiently performed. There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit can determine the dynamic display period. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means. One or more set values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit.

  Thus, a different dynamic display period can be determined according to the setting value determined by the determination unit, so that the determined dynamic display period can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the ratio of the difference to the number set in the above is set to be an integer.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, the number of set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is equal to the number of determination values in a predetermined range. Since the ratio to the difference between the number and the number set to the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to an integer. Therefore, when designing the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the gaming machine, there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbols was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means. A game machine B5 comprising: a notification mode setting unit that sets a specific notification mode when the setting is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the period information is displayed even after a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbol was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means in the peripheral control means. When a signal is not received, a specific notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means, so that the player or the hall clerk recognizes that the period information signal has not been received for a specific period by the specific notification mode. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine B5, the specific period is a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal, so that the state in which the period information signal cannot be received may be a plurality of times. Can be prevented from continuing over the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that a defect of the period information signal can be reported earlier.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific determination value is determined by the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. The gaming machine B7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. When the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation, the ratio of the number set in the set value is an integer, so when designing the ratio of the dynamic display period in the development stage of the gaming machine This has the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. Further, there is an effect that the ratio at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is more easily understood by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the main control unit determines that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value by the determination unit, Until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control unit and determination of the new determination value by the determination unit are repeated. A gaming machine B8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is determined by the determining unit to be a specific determination value different from the set value, Until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, the acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control unit and the determination of the new determination value by the determination unit are repeated by the main control unit. The dynamic display time can be reliably determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the dynamic display is not executed in the peripheral control unit.

<Characteristic C group>
Generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value composed of values within a predetermined range, obtaining means for obtaining the determination value based on satisfaction of a first condition by the generating means, and obtaining means for the determination value Storage means for storing the determination value obtained in step (a), determination means for determining the determination value obtained by the obtaining means, and the determination value obtained by the obtaining means by the determination means being a specific determination value When it is determined, based on the establishment of the second condition and the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the newly generated determination value without storing the specific determination value in the storage unit, A control process determining unit that determines a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage unit, wherein the number of the specific determination values is such that the execution ratio of the control process is an integer ratio. Is set to Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the at it.

  In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined upper limit number of the determination values. If the determination value exceeds the upper limit number, the storage means overwrites one of the stored determination values. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being executed.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein the first condition in the gaming machine C1 or C2 is configured to be more easily satisfied than the second condition.

  In one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a predetermined number of the determination values are determined in advance by the determination value defining means, and the determination values defined by the determination value defining means are stored in the storage means based on power-on. A gaming machine C4 comprising: storage control means for performing control so as to store the predetermined number of determination values other than the specific determination value.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the control processing determining means determines one control processing from a plurality of control processings, and one or more control processings are determined for each of the plurality of control processings. The number of the determination values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes, wherein the number of the determination values assigned to each of the plurality of control processes is the number of the determination values within the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the ratio with respect to the difference from the number is set to be an integer.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the acquisition unit acquires the determination value.

<Characteristic D group> (Pulse replay after replay)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a ball entry information acquiring means for acquiring ball entry information based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and before the ball is acquired by the ball entry information acquiring means. Based on the filled ball information, a discriminating means for performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a case where the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means A bonus granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player; a generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range in the gaming machine having the same; and the determination generated by the generating means. Acquiring means for acquiring a value, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Said judgment When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit and the dynamic display mode determining unit that is determined based on the determination result, the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific value. When the determination value is a determination value, when the dynamic display mode of the acquisition control unit and the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit is determined, the specific determination value is obtained by the acquisition. Means for temporarily stopping and displaying the identification information at least once during execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the newly obtained determination value. And a gaming machine D1.

  In the gaming machine D1, the temporary stop display means determines the number of times of the temporary stop based on the number of times the specific determination value is obtained when the one dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine D2.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein the specific determination value in the gaming machine D1 or D2 is set to a large value when the determination unit determines that the specific determination result is the specific determination result.

  The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a specific dynamic display mode determined when the specific determination result is determined by the determining means. And at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes determined when the result is other than the specific determination result are set, and the determination values are respectively set for the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode. Is a game machine D4 which is assigned and set in advance.

  In the gaming machine D4, the number of the specific determination values is set so that a ratio at which the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is determined is an integer. Gaming machine D5.

<Feature E group> (Common random number acquisition)
When the first condition is satisfied with the first generation unit that updates and generates the first determination value with a value within the first range, the first determination value acquired from the first generation unit is the specific first determination value. A first determination means for determining whether the first determination value is obtained, a first control means for executing the first control when the first determination value determines that the first determination value is obtained, and a second range. When a second generation unit that updates and generates the second determination value with the value of the second condition and a second condition different from the first condition are satisfied, the second determination value acquired from the second generation unit is specified. A second determining means for determining whether the value is the second determination value, and performing a second control different from the first control when the second determining value determines that the value is the specific second determination value. Based on the second control means and one of the first and second conditions being satisfied. Te, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a obtaining means for obtaining a more and each of the first judgment value and the second judgment value and said first generating means and the second generating means E1.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a random lottery of a special symbol based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port and performs a random lottery of a normal symbol based on a passing of a gaming ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port is obtained, and the normal symbol is determined based on the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for a normal symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, JP 2012-010910 A). In this case, it is necessary to make the control process different between a case where the game ball has won the starting port and a case where the game ball has passed through the through gate, and there has been a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is generated by updating the first determination value with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination unit determines whether the first determination value obtained by the first generation unit is a specific first determination value, and the first determination unit determines the specific first determination value. When it is determined that the value is the first value, the first control means executes the first control. The second determination value is generated by updating the second determination value with a value within the second range. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determination unit determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generation unit is a specific second determination value. When it is determined by the second determination unit that the value is the specific second determination value, a second control different from the first control is executed by the second control unit. Based on either one of the first condition and the second condition being satisfied, a first determination value and a second determination value are obtained by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, by the obtaining unit.

  Thus, the operation of the acquisition unit can be shared between the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the control processing can be prevented from becoming complicated. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  The gaming machine E2, further comprising a storage unit that stores the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit in the gaming machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit are stored by the storage unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination by the means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since there is no need to make an immediate determination using each determination value obtained by the obtaining unit, there is an effect that the degree of freedom such as the processing order in the control processing can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a determination by the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is executed. Gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the satisfied first condition or second condition is performed, and thus the predetermined condition is obtained by the obtaining unit. It is possible to prevent the first determination value or the second determination value from being discarded before being used for the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of the determination based on the abnormal determination value.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is a control for giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a control that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. 2. A gaming machine E4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, control for giving the first privilege that is more advantageous to the player is performed by the first control, and control for giving the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is performed by the second control. Done.

  This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which a game ball can pass. The first condition is based on a game ball passing through the passing means. The game machine E5, wherein the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the first condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the ball entering the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball. Holds.

  This allows the player to recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  A first detection unit that detects the establishment of the first condition in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a second detection unit that detects the establishment of the second condition, and the first detection unit and the second detection unit. A predetermined condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result; and a predetermined control for executing control in accordance with the satisfied predetermined condition when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. And a control execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detection unit, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detection unit. Based on the detection results of the first detecting means and the second detecting means, the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determining means, and when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied. The control according to the predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control executing means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, according to the control content of the predetermined control execution unit.

  A counting means for counting the number of times that the first condition is satisfied by the first detecting means in the gaming machine E6, and a counting by the counting means based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied by the second detecting means. Initializing means for initializing a result, wherein the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the counting result by the counting means is a predetermined number or more. Gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. That is, the number of times that the first condition is satisfied by the first detecting means is counted by the counting means. Then, the counting result of the counting means is initialized by the initialization means based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied by the second detection means. When the counting result by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition has been continuously detected a predetermined number of times or more without satisfying the second condition in accordance with the control content of the predetermined control execution unit.

  A third generation unit that generates a third determination value based on the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the obtaining unit in any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, and a third generation unit that generates the third determination value. Storage control means for storing the generated third determination value in the storage means until the first determination means or the second determination means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage unit, a specific condition determining unit that determines whether a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition determining unit. A gaming machine E8 comprising: a specific control execution unit configured to execute control based on the specific condition satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, a third determination value is generated by the third generation unit based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit, and the third determination value generated by the third generation unit is: The data is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit until the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the established first condition or second condition executes the determination. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage unit, whether the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the specific condition determination unit, and the specific condition determination unit determines whether the specific condition is satisfied. Is determined, the control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control execution unit.

  Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied according to the content of the control executed by the specific control execution unit.

  In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition determination unit is newly generated by the third generation unit based on the third determination value stored in the storage unit, the first determination value, and the second determination value. The gaming machine E9, wherein when the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E8, the game data is newly generated by the third generating means based on the third determination value stored in the storage means, and the first determination value and the second determination value. If the third determination value is different from the third determination value, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit. Therefore, the first generation unit and the second generation There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not each determination value is normally updated by the means.

  When the first condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, a predetermined determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit, and a determination result of the predetermined determination unit A game machine E10, comprising: a notifying unit that performs notification based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine E10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E9. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, a predetermined determination is made by the predetermined determination unit based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit. Then, notification is performed by the notification unit based on the determination result by the predetermined determination unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily know the determination result of the predetermined determination according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

  A display unit capable of displaying identification information in the gaming machine E10; and a dynamic display unit capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit based on the satisfaction of the second condition. The gaming machine E11, wherein the notifying unit displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determining unit during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display unit.

  According to the gaming machine E11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E10. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, based on the satisfaction of the second condition. Then, during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means is displayed by the notification means.

  Thereby, since the display mode during the execution of the dynamic display can be diversified, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature F group> (can be acquired twice in one interrupt process)
The first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with the value in the first range, the second generation means for updating and generating the second determination value with the value in the second range, and the control processing of the game are repeated. A gaming machine having executable control means and interrupt means capable of executing an interrupt processing by interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined opportunity, wherein the interrupt means satisfies a first condition. Based on the result, as one processing of the interrupt processing, a first acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, A first control unit that executes a first control when the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit is determined to be the specific first determination value; and a second condition different from the first condition. Is executed later than the first acquisition unit based on the fact that As one process of the interrupt process, a second obtaining unit that obtains the first determination value and the second determination value newly updated by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, and A second control unit configured to execute a second control different from the first control when the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining unit is determined to be the specific second determination value. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a random lottery of a special symbol based on a winning of a gaming ball to a starting port and performs a random lottery of a normal symbol based on a passing of a gaming ball through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port is obtained, and the normal symbol is determined based on the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate. There is one that acquires a determination value for a normal symbol for performing a lottery. (For example, JP 2012-010910 A). In this case, it is necessary to make the control process different between a case where the game ball has won the starting port and a case where the game ball has passed through the through gate, and there has been a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, based on the first condition being satisfied by the interrupt means, the first generation means and the second generation means respectively perform the first determination value and the second generation means as one processing of the interruption processing. The second determination value is obtained by the first obtaining unit. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value obtained by the first obtaining means is the specific first determination value, the first control is executed by the first control means. In addition, based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the first generation unit and the second generation unit respectively perform a new process as an interrupt process acquired after the first acquisition unit. The first determination value and the second determination value that have been updated are acquired by the second acquisition unit. When it is determined that the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining means is the specific second determination value, a second control different from the first control is executed by the second control means.

  Accordingly, the second obtaining unit obtains the newly updated first determination value and the second determination value. Therefore, an independent determination different from the first determination value and the second determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit. You can get the value. Therefore, there is an effect that fairness when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value can be secured. That is, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second generation unit updates and generates the second determination value at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation unit at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit. Therefore, the second determination value acquired based on the establishment of the second condition is a newly updated and generated determination value after the first determination unit acquires the second determination value. Therefore, even in a case where the first determination value and the second determination value are respectively acquired by the first acquisition unit and the second acquisition unit in one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit is performed. The value is an independent determination value different from the second determination value obtained by the first obtaining unit. As a result, there is an effect that fairness can be ensured when the second control means determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interrupt processes, the interruption by the first acquisition unit and the interruption by the second acquisition unit And F. acquisition in the one interruption process.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, the first acquisition unit acquires the first condition and the second condition by the interruption unit. Since the acquisition by the second acquisition means is performed in one interrupt process, it can be determined whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, and the one interrupt process can be performed. In the processing, the first determination value and the second determination value can be obtained based on the establishment of the first condition and the second condition, respectively, so that the first determination value and the second determination value can be efficiently obtained. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first control is a control for providing a first privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a control that is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege. (2) A gaming machine F4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, a first privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the first control. Further, the second control gives a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege.

  This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is provided a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a passing means through which a game ball can pass. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, the first condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the passage means. Further, the second condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the ball entry means.

  This allows the player to recognize the opportunity that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, every time it is recognized that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A gaming machine Z2 wherein any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine Z3 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that performs various types of determination, such as determination as to whether or not a game ball has won a starting winning opening and determination of a display effect mode, is known. In such a gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the value of a determination value (for example, a random number counter or the like) matches a predetermined set value, and when the determination value matches the set value, the value corresponding to the set value is determined. (For example, determination of an effect mode) is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-331078).
However, there has been a demand for a more suitable method of setting the set values.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting a set value.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a generating unit capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range, and an obtaining unit for obtaining the determination value generated by the generating unit. And determining means for determining whether the determination value obtained by the obtaining means matches a predetermined set value, and when determining that the determined value matches the set value, determining whether the determined value matches the set value. Control means for executing a correspondingly set process, and, when it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining means is a specific determination value different from the set value, The acquisition unit having an acquisition control unit that controls the acquisition unit so as to acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit, the number set to the specific determination value, the number of the determination value of the predetermined range The quantity and the specific On the difference between the number set in the value, the ratio of the number set in the set value is one that is set to be an integer.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the generating unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than a shortest interval in which the obtaining unit obtains the determination value. is there.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit, and the control unit executes the control process. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the possible control processes, and the control unit executes the control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is equal to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range. The ratio is set so that the ratio to the difference from the number set to the specific determination value is an integer.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the determination value is continuously determined without being determined by the determination unit to match the predetermined set value. The number counting means for counting the number of consecutive times when it is determined to be the specific determination value, and the determination by the determining means based on the fact that the number of continuous times counted by the number counting means has become a specific number. A determination ending means for ending the determination.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is determined to be a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation unit is determined. The acquisition means is controlled by the acquisition control means to acquire. Here, the number set to the specific determination value is a ratio of the number set to the set value to the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.
Thereby, there is an effect that the set value can be set more appropriately.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination value is updated by the generation means in a shorter time than the shortest interval at which the obtaining means obtains the determination value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the acquisition unit from acquiring the same determination value a plurality of times before the determination unit is updated by the generation unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination result by the determination unit from being biased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control unit. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means. Then, a control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit is executed by the control unit.
Thus, different control processes can be executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means, so that there is an effect that various control processes can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is determined in a predetermined range. Since the ratio of the difference between the number of values and the number set for the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio at which each control process is executed should be a value that is easier for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means. The determination by the determination means is terminated by the determination termination means based on the fact that the continuous number counted by the means has reached the specific number.
Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the specific determination value is continuously determined and the other control processing cannot be executed during that time.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 main control means (control means, interrupt means)
900 special figure random number generation IC (first generation means)
901 General-purpose random number generation IC (second generation means)
S215 Part of the second control means
S461 Second acquisition means
S516, S517, S525 First control means
S661 First acquisition means
Part of S1006 second control means

Claims (5)

Generating means capable of updating and generating a determination value in a predetermined range;
Obtaining means for obtaining the determination value generated by the generating means;
Determining means for determining whether the determination value obtained by the obtaining means matches a predetermined setting value,
Control means for executing a process set in accordance with the set value when it is determined that the set value matches the set value,
When it is determined that the determination value obtained by the obtaining unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the obtaining unit may obtain the determination value newly generated by the generating unit. Has an acquisition control means for controlling the
The number set to the specific determination value is a difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, the number of the number set to the set value. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio is set to be an integer.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the generation unit updates the determination value in a shorter time than a shortest interval at which the obtaining unit obtains the determination value. In the control process executed by the control means, a plurality of different control processes are set,
One or more set values are assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the control unit executes the control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination unit.   The number of the set values allocated to each of the control processes executable by the control means is a ratio of the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value to an integer. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is set so as to satisfy the following. Number counting means for counting the number of consecutive times when the determination value is determined to be the specific determination value continuously without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means,
5. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising: a determination termination unit configured to terminate the determination performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the number of consecutive times counted by the number counting unit has reached a specific number. 6. Gaming machine.

Images